1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Copper Mountain Technologies Manuals
  4. Measuring Instruments
  5. PXIe-S5090
  6. Operating and programming manual

Copper Mountain Technologies PXIe-S5090 Operating And Programming Manual

Network analyzers using pxi software
Hide thumbs
1
Table Of Contents
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
Network Analyzers using PXI software
Operating and Programming manual
U.S.: +1.317.222.5400
Latin America: +1.9154.706.5920
631 E New York Street | Indianapolis, IN 46202 USA
Revision 22.2 20.10.2022
Singapore: +65.63.23.6546
EMEA: +44 75 03 69 21 13
www.coppermountaintech.com

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the PXIe-S5090 and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Subscribe to Our Youtube Channel

Related Manuals for Copper Mountain Technologies PXIe-S5090

Summary of Contents for Copper Mountain Technologies PXIe-S5090

  • Page 1 631 E New York Street | Indianapolis, IN 46202 USA www.coppermountaintech.com Network Analyzers using PXI software Operating and Programming manual Revision 22.2 20.10.2022 U.S.: +1.317.222.5400 Singapore: +65.63.23.6546 Latin America: +1.9154.706.5920 EMEA: +44 75 03 69 21 13...

  • Page 2: Table Of Contents

    Configuring hardware in NI MAX ................63 Renaming a Hardware Module in NI MAX ............65 File locations ........................ 66 Command Line Parameters ..................69 PXIe-S5090, Front panel ..........................70 Getting Started ............................... 73 Analyzer Preparation for Reflection Measurement ..........76 Analyzer Presetting ..................... 77 Stimulus Setting ......................
  • Page 3 Contents Softkey Bar ........................91 Menu Bar ........................93 Channel Window Layout and Functions ..............94 Channel Title Bar ....................96 Trace Status Field ....................97 Diagram ......................... 101 Trace Layout in the Channel Window ..............103 Markers ........................104 Channel Status Bar ....................
  • Page 4 Contents CW Time Sweep Mode ..................143 Trigger Settings ......................146 Trigger State Diagram ..................147 Trigger Source ...................... 152 Channel Initiation Mode ..................154 Trigger Scope ....................... 156 Averaging Trigger ....................157 External Trigger Settings ..................159 External Trigger Event ..................160 External Trigger Polarity ..................
  • Page 5 Contents Automatic Scaling ....................200 Reference Level Automatic Selection ..............201 Automatic Reference Level Tracking ..............202 Electrical Delay Setting ..................203 Phase Offset Setting .................... 206 Measurement Optimization ..................207 IF Bandwidth Setting .................... 208 Averaging Setting ....................209 Averaging Trigger ....................
  • Page 6 Contents Power Level/CW Frequency Setting ..............233 Marker Stimulus Value Setting ................234 Calibration and Calibration Kits ......................235 General Information ....................236 Basic Calibration Guidelines ................237 Measurement Errors .................... 239 Systematic Errors ....................240 Error Model ......................246 One-Port Error Model ..................
  • Page 7 Contents Transmission Normalization ................290 Full One-Port Calibration ..................293 One-Path Two-Port Calibration ................295 Full Two-Port Calibration ..................300 Sliding Load Calibration ..................304 Non-Insertable Device Measuring ..............306 Unknown Thru Requirements ................310 Unknown Thru Calibration ................312 Unknown Thru Addition ...................
  • Page 8 Contents Manual Switch Control ..................367 Error Correction Status ..................... 368 Error Correction Disabling ..................370 System Impedance Z0 ....................371 Calibration Trigger Source ..................373 Measurement Data Analysis ........................ 374 Markers ........................375 Reference Marker Feature .................. 381 Marker Properties ....................383 Marker Coupling Feature ................
  • Page 9 Contents Marker Functions ....................415 Memory Trace Function .................... 417 Memory FIFO ......................420 Mathematical Operations ..................423 Trace Hold ........................425 Fixture Simulation ...................... 426 Port Extension ....................... 430 Automatic Port Extension ..................433 Port Reference Impedance (Z) Conversion ............436 De-embedding ......................
  • Page 10 Contents Trace Data Touchstone File ..................507 System Settings ..............................513 Analyzer Presetting ....................513 Graph Printing ......................514 Reference Frequency Oscillator Selection ............. 517 System Correction Setting ..................518 Power Trip Function ....................519 Network Settings ....................... 520 Power Meter Settings ....................523 Beeper Settings ......................
  • Page 11 Contents Simulation Mode ....................... 554 Plugins ........................555 About .......................... 556 Programming ..............................557 Connection Setup ...................... 558 Analyzer Setting ....................559 Client Setting ......................560 VISA Library ......................561 Network and Local Configuration ............... 562 Multiple Analyzers on PXI Chassis ..............564 Differences in Use of HiSLIP and Socket Protocols ........
  • Page 12 Contents Character Data ....................584 String Parameters ................... 585 Numeric Lists ....................586 Query Commands ....................587 Numeric Suffixes ....................588 Compound Commands ..................589 IEEE488.2 Common Commands Overview ............590 Internal Data Arrays ....................591 Command Reference ....................598 SCPI Command Tree ..................
  • Page 13 Contents CALC:CORR:EDEL:DIST:UNIT ..............632 CALC:CORR:EDEL:MED ................634 CALC:CORR:EDEL:RVEL ................636 CALC:CORR:EDEL:TIME ................638 CALC:CORR:EDEL:WAV:CUT ..............640 CALC:CORR:OFFS:PHAS ................642 CALC:CORR:STAT? ..................644 CALC:DATA:FDAT ..................646 CALC:DATA:FMEM ..................649 CALC:DATA:SDAT ..................652 CALC:DATA:SMEM ..................654 CALC:DATA:XAX? ..................656 CALC:FILT:TIME ..................... 658 CALC:FILT:TIME:CENT ..................
  • Page 14 Contents CALC:FSIM:SEND:ZCON:PORT:Z0:IMAG ..........685 CALC:FSIM:SEND:ZCON:STAT ..............687 CALC:FSIM:SEND:ZCON:THE ..............688 CALC:FSIM:STAT ................... 689 CALC:FUNC:DATA? ..................690 CALC:FUNC:DOM ..................692 CALC:FUNC:DOM:COUP ................694 CALC:FUNC:DOM:STAR ................696 CALC:FUNC:DOM:STOP ................698 CALC:FUNC:EXEC ..................700 CALC:FUNC:PEXC ..................701 CALC:FUNC:POIN? ..................703 CALC:FUNC:PPOL ..................705 CALC:FUNC:TARG ..................
  • Page 15 Contents CALC:MARK ....................733 CALC:MARK:ACT ................... 735 CALC:MARK:BWID ..................737 CALC:MARK:BWID:DATA? ................739 CALC:MARK:BWID:REF ................741 CALC:MARK:BWID:THR ................743 CALC:MARK:BWID:TYPE ................745 CALC:MARK:COUN ..................747 CALC:MARK:COUP ..................749 CALC:MARK:DATA? ..................751 CALC:MARK:DISC ..................753 CALC:MARK:FUNC:DOM ................755 CALC:MARK:FUNC:DOM:COUP ..............757 CALC:MARK:FUNC:DOM:STAR ..............
  • Page 16 Contents CALC:MARK:X ....................789 CALC:MARK:Y? ....................791 CALC:MATH:FUNC ..................793 CALC:MATH:MEM ..................795 CALC:MST ....................... 796 CALC:MST:DATA? ..................798 CALC:MST:DOM ..................... 800 CALC:MST:DOM:STAR ................. 802 CALC:MST:DOM:STOP ................. 804 CALC:PAR:COUN ..................806 CALC:PAR:DEF ....................807 CALC:PAR:SEL ....................809 CALC:PAR:SPOR ................... 810 CALC:RLIM ......................
  • Page 17 Contents CALC:TRAN:TIME:LPFR ................840 CALC:TRAN:TIME:REFL:TYPE ..............841 CALC:TRAN:TIME:SPAN ................843 CALC:TRAN:TIME:STAR ................845 CALC:TRAN:TIME:STOP ................847 CALC:TRAN:TIME:STAT ................849 CALC:TRAN:TIME:STEP:RTIM ..............851 CALC:TRAN:TIME:STIM ................. 853 CALC:TRAN:TIME:UNIT ................. 855 DISPlay ........................857 DISP:COL:BACK .................... 861 DISP:COL:GRAT ..................... 862 DISP:COL:RES ....................863 DISP:COL:TRAC:DATA .................
  • Page 18 Contents DISP:SPL ......................883 DISP:UPD ......................885 DISP:WIND:ACT ....................886 DISP:WIND:ANN:MARK:ALIG ............... 887 DISP:WIND:ANN:MARK:SING ............... 889 DISP:WIND:MAX ..................... 890 DISP:WIND:SPL ....................891 DISP:WIND:TITL ....................893 DISP:WIND:TITL:DATA .................. 894 DISP:WIND:TRAC:ANN:MARK:POS:X ............895 DISP:WIND:TRAC:ANN:MARK:POS:Y ............897 DISP:WIND:TRAC:MEM ................. 899 DISP:WIND:TRAC:STAT ................901 DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:AUTO ................
  • Page 19 Contents HCOP:DATE:STAM ..................922 HCOP:IMAG ..................... 923 HCOP:PAIN ...................... 924 INITiate ........................925 INIT ........................926 INIT:CONT ......................927 INIT:CONT:ALL ....................929 MMEMory ......................930 MMEM:CAT? ....................934 MMEM:COPY ....................935 MMEM:DEL ...................... 936 MMEM:LOAD ....................937 MMEM:LOAD:CHAN ..................938 MMEM:LOAD:CHAN:CAL ................
  • Page 20 Contents MMEM:STOR:FDAT ..................954 MMEM:STOR:FDAT:SCOP ................955 MMEM:STOR:FDAT:FORM ................956 MMEM:STOR:FDAT:COMM ................957 MMEM:STOR:FDAT:STIM ................958 MMEM:STOR:FDAT:SEP ................959 MMEM:STOR:IMAG ..................960 MMEM:STOR:LIM .................... 961 MMEM:STOR:PLOS ..................962 MMEM:STOR:RLIM ..................963 MMEM:STOR:SEGM ..................964 MMEM:STOR:SNP ..................965 MMEM:STOR:SNP:FORM ................966 MMEM:STOR:SNP:SEP ................
  • Page 21 Contents SENS:CORR:COEF ..................1003 SENS:CORR:COEF:METH:ERES ............. 1005 SENS:CORR:COEF:METH:OPEN ............. 1006 SENS:CORR:COEF:METH:SHOR ............. 1007 SENS:CORR:COEF:METH:SOLT1 ............1008 SENS:CORR:COEF:METH:SOLT2 ............1009 SENS:CORR:COEF:METH:THRU .............. 1010 SENS:CORR:COEF:SAVE ................. 1012 SENS:CORR:COLL:ADAP:DEL ..............1013 SENS:CORR:COLL:ADAP:LENG .............. 1015 SENS:CORR:COLL:ADAP:UNIT ..............1017 SENS:CORR:COLL:ADAP:MED ..............1018 SENS:CORR:COLL:ADAP:PERM ............. 1019 SENS:CORR:COLL:ADAP:WAV:CUT ............
  • Page 22 Contents SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:STAN:C0 ............1036 SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:STAN:C1 ............1037 SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:STAN:C2 ............1038 SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:STAN:C3 ............1039 SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:STAN:COUN? ..........1040 SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:STAN:DATA ............. 1041 SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:STAN:DEL ............1043 SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:STAN:FMAX ............ 1044 SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:STAN:FMIN ............1045 SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:STAN:INS ............1046 SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:STAN:L0 ............1047 SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:STAN:L1 ............1048 SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:STAN:L2 ............1049 SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:STAN:L3 ............
  • Page 23 Contents SENS:CORR:COLL:ECAL:INF? ..............1074 SENS:CORR:COLL:ECAL:ORI:EXEC ............1076 SENS:CORR:COLL:ECAL:ORI:STAT ............1077 SENS:CORR:COLL:ECAL:PATH ............... 1078 SENS:CORR:COLL:ECAL:SOLT1 ............. 1079 SENS:CORR:COLL:ECAL:SOLT2 ............. 1080 SENS:CORR:COLL:ECAL:THER:COMP ..........1081 SENS:CORR:COLL:ECAL:UCH ..............1082 SENS:CORR:COLL:ECAL:UTHR:STAT ............ 1084 SENS:CORR:COLL:ISOL ................1085 SENS:CORR:COLL:LOAD ................1087 SENS:CORR:COLL:OPEN ................1088 SENS:CORR:COLL:SHOR ................1089 SENS:CORR:COLL:THRU ................
  • Page 24 Contents SENS:CORR:COLL:THRU:ADD:DEL ............1108 SENS:CORR:COLL:THRU:ADD:LENG ............. 1110 SENS:CORR:COLL:THRU:ADD:UNIT ............1112 SENS:CORR:COLL:THRU:ADD:MED ............1113 SENS:CORR:COLL:THRU:ADD:PERM ............ 1115 SENS:CORR:COLL:THRU:ADD:WAV:CUT ..........1116 SENS:CORR:COLL:THRU:ADD:FULL2:COMP ........1117 SENS:CORR:EXT ..................1118 SENS:CORR:EXT:AUTO:CONF ..............1119 SENS:CORR:EXT:AUTO:DCOF ..............1121 SENS:CORR:EXT:AUTO:LOSS ..............1122 SENS:CORR:EXT:AUTO:MEAS ..............1123 SENS:CORR:EXT:AUTO:PORT ..............1124 SENS:CORR:EXT:AUTO:RES ..............
  • Page 25 Contents SENS:CORR:OFFS:COLL:LOAD .............. 1150 SENS:CORR:OFFS:COLL:METH:SMIX2 ..........1151 SENS:CORR:OFFS:COLL:OPEN .............. 1152 SENS:CORR:OFFS:COLL:PMET .............. 1153 SENS:CORR:OFFS:COLL:SHOR .............. 1154 SENS:CORR:OFFS:COLL:THRU ............... 1155 SENS:CORR:OFFS:COLL:SAVE .............. 1156 SENS:CORR:PORT:IMP ................1157 SENS:CORR:REC ..................1158 SENS:CORR:REC:COLL:ACQ ..............1159 SENS:CORR:REC:COLL:RCH:ACQ ............1160 SENS:CORR:REC:COLL:TCH:ACQ ............1161 SENS:CORR:REC:OFFS:AMPL ..............1162 SENS:CORR:STAT ..................
  • Page 26 Contents SENS:CORR:VMC:COLL:SAVE ..............1183 SENS:DATA:CORR? ................... 1184 SENS:DATA:RAWD? ................... 1186 SENS:FREQ ....................1188 SENS:FREQ:DATA? ..................1190 SENS:FREQ:CENT ..................1191 SENS:FREQ:SPAN ..................1193 SENS:FREQ:STAR ..................1195 SENS:FREQ:STOP ..................1197 SENS:OFFS ....................1199 SENS:OFFS:ADJ ..................1200 SENS:OFFS:ADJ:CONT:PER ..............1201 SENS:OFFS:ADJ:EXEC ................1202 SENS:OFFS:ADJ:PATH ................
  • Page 27 Contents SENS:OFFS:SOUR:DATA? ................ 1226 SENS:OFFS:SOUR:DIV ................1227 SENS:OFFS:SOUR:MULT ................1229 SENS:OFFS:SOUR:OFFS ................1231 SENS:OFFS:SOUR:STAR ................1233 SENS:OFFS:SOUR:STOP ................1234 SENS:OFFS:TYPE ..................1235 SENS:ROSC:SOUR ..................1237 SENS:ROSC:EXT:ROUT ................1238 SENS:SEGM:DATA ..................1239 SENS:SWE:CW:TIME .................. 1242 SENS:SWE:POIN ..................1243 SENS:SWE:POIN:TIME ................1244 SENS:SWE:REV ..................
  • Page 28 Contents SOUR:POW ....................1263 SOUR:POW:CENT ..................1265 SOUR:POW:PORT ..................1267 SOUR:POW:PORT:CORR ................1269 SOUR:POW:PORT:CORR:INT? ..............1271 SOUR:POW:PORT:CORR:COLL ............... 1272 SOUR:POW:PORT:CORR:COLL:TABL:LOSS:DATA ......1273 SOUR:POW:PORT:CORR:COLL:TABL:LOSS ......... 1275 SOUR:POW:PORT:CORR:DATA ............... 1277 SOUR:POW:PORT:COUP ................1279 SOUR:POW:SLOP ..................1280 SOUR:POW:SLOP:STAT ................1282 SOUR:POW:SPAN ..................1283 SOUR:POW:STAR ..................
  • Page 29 Contents STAT:QUES:LIM:CHAN? ................1304 STAT:QUES:LIM:COND? ................1305 STAT:QUES:LIM:ENAB ................1306 STAT:QUES:LIM:NTR ................... 1307 STAT:QUES:LIM:PTR ................... 1308 STAT:QUES:LIM? ..................1309 STAT:QUES:NTR ..................1310 STAT:QUES:PTR ..................1311 STAT:QUES:RLIM:CHAN:COND? ............. 1312 STAT:QUES:RLIM:CHAN:ENAB ..............1313 STAT:QUES:RLIM:CHAN:NTR ..............1314 STAT:QUES:RLIM:CHAN:PTR ..............1315 STAT:QUES:RLIM:CHAN? ................1316 STAT:QUES:RLIM:COND? ................
  • Page 30 Contents SYST:COMM:ECAL:CHEC ................. 1335 SYST:COMM:ECAL:DATA? ................ 1336 SYST:COMM:ECAL:FREQ:DATA? ............1338 SYST:COMM:ECAL:POIN? ................. 1339 SYST:COMM:ECAL:IMP ................1340 SYST:COMM:ECAL:READy? ..............1342 SYST:COMM:ECAL:TEMP:SENS? ............1343 SYST:COMM:ECAL:THRU ................1344 SYST:COMM:PSEN:NI568x:RES:NAME ........... 1345 SYST:COMM:PSEN:READ? ............... 1346 SYST:COMM:PSEN:TYPE ................1347 SYST:COMM:PSEN:ZERO ................1349 SYST:CONN:SER:NUMB ................1350 SYST:CORR ....................
  • Page 31 Contents SYST:SERV:PVER:LAST ................1367 SYST:SERV:PVER:NEXT ................1368 SYST:SHOW ....................1369 SYST:TEMP:SENS? ..................1370 SYST:TEST? ....................1371 SYST:TERM ....................1372 SYST:TIME ..................... 1373 TRIGger ....................... 1374 TRIG ........................ 1376 TRIG:AVER ....................1377 TRIG:EXT:DEL ....................1379 TRIG:EXT:SLOP .................... 1381 TRIG:EXT:POS ....................1382 TRIG:EXT:ROUT ....................
  • Page 32 Contents VISA Timeout Considerations ................1406 Receiving Data Arrays in Text Format ............. 1407 Receiving Data Arrays Binary Format ............. 1408 IEEE488.2 Status Reporting System ..............1410 Error Codes ......................1417 Programming Examples ..................1420 Maintenance and Storage ........................1428 Maintenance Procedures ..................
  • Page 33 Contents Specifications ....................1479 Measurement Capabilities ................1480 Principle of Operation ................... 1485 Types of Calibration Standards ..............1486 Attenuator ....................... 1486 Module Block Diagrams ................1487 Preparation for Use .................... 1491 Operating Restrictions .................. 1491 Installation ....................... 1493 Software ......................1494 Operation Procedure ..................
  • Page 34 Contents Automation ..................... 1513 Maintenance ....................... 1514 Maintenance Procedure ................1514 Maintenance Activities .................. 1515 Cleaning Connectors ..................1516 Gauging Connectors ..................1517 Connecting and Disconnecting Devices ............. 1519 Cleaning and Care of the Protective Housing ..........1521 Ambient Conditions Control ................. 1522 Verification .....................

  • Page 35: Introduction

    Introduction This manual contains design, specifications, functional overview, and detailed operation procedures for the Copper Mountain Technologies PXIe-S5090Vector Network Analyzer, to ensure effective and safe use of its technical capabilities. Maintenance and operation of the Analyzer should be performed by qualified engineers with basic experience in the operation of microwave circuits.

  • Page 36: Scope Of Manual

    Scope of Manual This manual covers the two-port models of the PXI Network Analyzers controlled by the S2VNA software. The analyzer models are listed below: · PXI-s5090 Page 36...

  • Page 37: Safety Instructions

    The Analyzer is for INDOOR USE only. The Analyzer has been tested as a stand-alone device and in combination with the accessories supplied by Copper Mountain Technologies, in accordance with the requirements of the standards described in the Declaration of Conformity. If the Analyzer is integrated with another system, compliance with related regulations and safety requirements are to be confirmed by the builder of the system.
  • Page 38 Refers to the Manual if the instrument is marked with this symbol. Alternating current. Direct current. On (Supply). Off (Supply). A chassis terminal; a connection to the instrument’s chassis, which includes all exposed metal surfaces. This sign denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure, WARNING practice, or condition that, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in injury or death to personnel.

  • Page 39: General Overview

    General Overview The Vector Network Analyzer is designed for use in the process of development, adjustment, and testing of various electronic devices in industrial and laboratory facilities, including operation as a component of an automated measurement system. The Analyzer is designed for operation with an external PC, which is not supplied with the Analyzer.

  • Page 40: Specifications

    Specifications The specifications of each Analyzer model can be found in its corresponding datasheet. Measurement Capabilities Measured parameters S11, S21, S12, S22 Absolute power of the incident, reflected or transmitted DUT signals. Number Up to 16 channels. Each channel is represented on the measurement screen as an individual channel window.
  • Page 41 Sweep setup features Sweep type Linear, logarithmic, and segment frequency sweep, when the stimulus power is a fixed value. Power sweep Linear power sweep when the frequency is a fixed value. CW time sweep Linear time sweep when the frequency and power are fixed values.
  • Page 42 Trace display functions Trace display Data trace, memory trace, or simultaneous data and memory traces. Trace math Data trace modification by math operations: addition, subtraction, multiplication or division between the data, and memory traces. Autoscaling Automatic selection of the scale division and reference level value to have the trace most effectively displayed.
  • Page 43 Accuracy enhancement Calibration Calibration of a test setup (which includes the Analyzer, cables, and adapters) significantly increases accuracy of measurements. Calibration allows for correction of errors caused by imperfections in the measurement system: directivity, source, and load match, tracking, and isolation. Calibration methods following calibration...
  • Page 44 Electronic calibration Copper Mountain Technologies’ automatic calibration modules modules (ACMs) make Analyzer calibration faster and easier than traditional mechanical calibration and provides the highest accuracy. Sliding load calibration The use of sliding load calibration standard allows standard significant increase in calibration accuracy at high frequencies compared to a fixed load calibration standard.
  • Page 45 Marker functions Data markers Up to 16 markers for each trace. A marker indicates the stimulus value and measurement result at a given point of the trace. Reference marker Enables indication of any maker value as relative to the reference marker. Marker search Search for max, min, peak, or target values on a trace.
  • Page 46 Data analysis Port impedance This function converts S-parameters measured at the conversion Analyzer’s nominal port impedance into values which would be found if measured at arbitrary port impedance. De-embedding This function allows mathematical exclusion of the effects of the fixture circuit connected between the calibration plane and the DUT.
  • Page 47 Mixer / converter measurements Scalar mixer The scalar method allows measurement of scalar converter transmission S-parameters of mixers and other devices measurements having different input and output frequencies. No external mixers or other devices are required. The scalar method employs port frequency offset when there is a difference between receiver frequency and source frequency.
  • Page 48 · IVI.NET driver · LabView driver · SCPI commands Page 48...

  • Page 49: Principles Of Operation

    Principles of Operation The Vector Network Analyzer (VNA) is a tool for accurate measurement of complex transmission and reflection coefficients (S-parameters) of a Device Under Test (DUT). The Analyzer described in this manual consists of a PXI hardware module (Analyzer for RF measurements) and the supplied the S2VNA software.
  • Page 50 The block diagram of the Analyzer is represented in the following figure. The block diagram of the Analyzer The Analyzer consists of the following functional blocks: a Reference Oscillator, a Source Oscillator, a Local Oscillator, a power control Attenuator, a Switch, a Power Splitter, two Dual Directional Couplers, a four-channel Receiver, a digital signal processor (DSP), and a Power Supply.

  • Page 51: The Principle Of Measuring S-Parameters

    Switch changes the direction of the test signal through the DUT, switching the Source Oscillator signal between the two Directional Couplers. Thus, any port can be the source or receiver of a signal. If Port 1 is the source, Port 2 will be the receiver and vice versa.

  • Page 52: Summarized Description Of Hierarchy

    S-parameter definition The S-parameter is a relation between the complex magnitudes of two waves: Provided that the incoming wave is zero on all ports except the port n, where m, n denote the DUT port number. For a two-port DUT the Analyzer measures the full scattering matrix: For the measurement of S11, S21 parameters, test Port 1 will operate as a signal source.
  • Page 53 Hierarchy of measuring, processing, and displaying tools Analyzer Software is displayed as Analyzer Screen on the control PC screen, which contains the following: · Channel Windows – the diagram area in which the Channel is displayed. For a detailed description of the controls, see Channel Window Layout and Functions.
  • Page 54 Channel – a logical analyzer created by the software to perform DUT measurements with set parameters. The software supports up to 16 channels simultaneously, processing them one at a time. Thus, the same DUT can be sequentially measured by 16 logic analyzers with individual settings. The channel settings are: ·...
  • Page 55 The following functions apply to the trace: · Markers · Electrical Delay · Phase Offset · Time Domain Gating · S-Parameter Conversion · Limit Test Each channel window can display up to 16 charts simultaneously. Convenient placement of traces in the channel window is designated as Diagram. Traces can be placed in a single chart or grouped according to user settings in different charts.

  • Page 56: Internal Data Processing

    Internal Data Processing The following figure shows a flowchart of the Analyzer's internal data processing flow. For a detailed description of remote control access to internal data arrays see in Internal Data Arrays. Data Processing Flowchart The Analyzer's internal data processing consists of the following stages: ·...
  • Page 57 · Acquire Cal Data is measuring calibration standards. Complex measured data of all standards are stored in memory. For a detailed description, see Calibration Methods and Procedures. · Calc Error Terms is calculation of calibration coefficients based on measurement data of calibration standards in accordance with the selected calibration method.
  • Page 58 · Electrical Delay is the compensation of the electrical delay of the DUT when measuring the trace. Unlike port extension, the method is applied individually for each trace. See Electrical Delay Setting. · Phase Offset is setting a constant phase offset of the trace. See Phase Offset Setting.

  • Page 59: Preparation For Use

    PXIe controller. The software installation procedure is described in Software Installation. Install CMT VNA PXIe-S5090 hardware into the PXIe chassis. The hardware installation procedure is described in Hardware Installation. Configure CMT VNA PXIe-S5090 hardware in MAX.

  • Page 60: Software Installation

    Power-on Utility which is used to warm up the Analyzer at system start-up 1. Verify that the following software components are installed on the PXIe system on which the PXIe-S5090 software depends. Install them if necessary: · NI FlexRIO Driver ·...
  • Page 61 · IVI Shared Components 2. Install the CMT PXIe-S5090 VNA software. 2.1 Download the installation file Setup_PXIe_S2VNA_vX.X.exe from the Copper Mountain Technologies web site. 2.2 Run the Setup_PXIe_S2VNA_vX.X.exe installer file onto embedded controller in the PXIe chassis. Follow the instructions of the installation wizard.

  • Page 62: Hardware Installation

    Hardware installation Power off the PXI chassis. Install CMT PXIe-S5090 vector network analyzers into the PXI chassis. Power on the PXI chassis. Chassis Guidelines CMT PXIe-S5090 vector network analyzers can be installed in the following PXI Express chassis slots: ·...

  • Page 63: Configuring Hardware In Ni Max

    Configuring hardware in NI MAX Use NI Measurement & Automation Explorer (NI MAX) to configure CMT VNA hardware. NI MAX informs other programs about which devices reside in the system and how they are configured. NI MAX is automatically installed with NI-VISA. 1.
  • Page 64 5. For more details of the renaming CMT Vector Network Analyzer module, see Renaming a Hardware Module in NI MAX. Page 64...

  • Page 65: Renaming A Hardware Module In Ni Max

    Renaming a Hardware Module in NI MAX NI Measurement & Automation Explorer (NI MAX) allows you to rename your CMT vector network analyzer module. The NI MAX name is used in CmtNA to operate the hardware resources. The module name is not required to be changed from the default but doing so can make programming easier.

  • Page 66: File Locations

    File locations The installer Setup_PXIe_S2VNA_vX.X.exe installs the following files in the specified locations. Directory designations used: <CmtGuiRootDir> is an alias for the following Coppermountaintech file folder location: · (32-bit) Program Files\Coppermountaintech\PXI S2VNA\ · (64-bit) Program Files (x86)\Coppermountaintech\PXI S2VNA\ <CmtDataRootDir> is an alias for the following Coppermountaintech file folder location: Program Data\Coppermountaintech\PXI S2VNA\ <IVIROOTDIR32>...
  • Page 67 Item Installed Location CmtNA IVI-C driver Import <IVIROOTDIR32>\Lib\msc Library files (32-bit) CmtNA IVI-C driver Import <IVIROOTDIR32>\Lib_x64\msc Library files (64-bit) CmtNA IVI-C driver DLL (32- <IVIROOTDIR32>\Bin bit) CMT VNA IVI.NET driver DLL <IVIROOTDIR32>\Microsoft.NET\Framework32\ (32-bit) v4.0.30319\CmtNA IVI.NET Driver 20.3.1\ CMT VNA IVI.NET driver DLL <IVIROOTDIR64>\Microsoft.NET\Framework64\ (64-bit) v4.0.30319\CmtNA IVI.NET Driver 20.3.1\...
  • Page 68 Item Installed Location 64-bit) 20.3.1\Source\ Additional File Locations for Windows 64-bit Item Installed Location CmtNA IVI-C driver Header <IVIROOTDIR64>\Include files CmtNA IVI-C driver Import <IVIROOTDIR64>\Lib_x64\msc Library files (64-bit) CmtNA IVI-C driver DLL (64- <IVIROOTDIR64>\Bin bit) VNA Runtime File Location Item Installed Location VNA State Files and Data <CmtDataRootDir>\<VNA name>,...

  • Page 69: Command Line Parameters

    Command Line Parameters Below is the full list of supported parameters for the command line. S2VNA <resource name> [optional parameters] For example: S2VNA PXI1Slot5 /visible:off Parameter Description Displays the help message /SocketServer:<on| Enables or disables TCP/IP socket server off> /SocketPort:<num> Assigns socket server port [default is 5025] /HislipServer:<on|off>...

  • Page 70: Pxie-S5090, Front Panel

    PXIe-S5090, Front panel In this section the front panel of Analyzer are shown further, along with the controls located on panel. PXIe-S5090 front panel is represented in the following figure. PXIe-S5090 front panel The parts of the front panel Test ports with LED indicators The PORT 1 and test PORT 2 are intended for DUT connection.
  • Page 71 Each test port has a LED indicator. The test port can be used either as a source of the stimulus signal or as a receiver of the response signal from the DUT. The stimulus signal can only appear on one port at a time. When connecting the DUT to only one test port of the Analyzer, it is possible to measure the reflection parameters (e.g.
  • Page 72 · RED — The module has detected that the PLL is unlocked, especially when using the external reference source. External trigger signal input This connector allows to connect an external connector trigger source. Connector type is SMB male. TTL compatible inputs of 0 V to 5 V magnitude with minimum 2 µsec pulse width.

  • Page 73: Getting Started

    Getting Started This section is organized as a sample session of the Analyzer. It describes the main techniques for measurement, for example, measuring the reflection coefficient parameters of the DUT. SWR and reflection coefficient phase of the DUT will be analyzed.
  • Page 74 · Perform a one-port calibration. · Analyze SWR and reflection coefficient phase using markers. Page 74...
  • Page 75 NOTE The Analyzer can be controlled via softkey panel located on the right-hand part of the screen. The analyzer also allows to perform quick control by the mouse (See Quick Setting Using a Mouse). Page 75...

  • Page 76: Analyzer Preparation For Reflection Measurement

    Analyzer Preparation for Reflection Measurement Turn on the Analyzer and warm it up for the period of time stated in its specifications (40 minutes typically). Ready status indication The bottom line of the screen displays the instrument status bar. It should read Ready.

  • Page 77: Analyzer Presetting

    Analyzer Presetting Before starting the measurement session, reset the Analyzer to the initial condition. The initial condition setting is described in Default Settings Table. NOTE Softkeys controlling the Analyzer are located on the vertical panel on the right side of the analyzer screen (See Softkey Bar).

  • Page 78: Stimulus Setting

    Stimulus Setting After presetting the Analyzer, the stimulus parameters will be as follows: · Full frequency range of the instrument. · Linear sweep type. · 201 points. · Power level of 0 dBm. Settable parameters in the channel status bar Page 78...
  • Page 79 For the current example, set the frequency range from 10 MHz to 3 GHz. To set the start frequency of the frequency range to 10 MHz, use the following softkeys: Stimulus > Start Then enter «1», «0» from the keyboard. Complete the setting by pressing the «M»...

  • Page 80: If Bandwidth Setting

    IF Bandwidth Setting For the current example, set the IF bandwidth to 3 kHz. IF bandwidth value in the channel status bar To set the IF bandwidth to 3 kHz, use the following softkeys: Average > IF Bandwidth Then enter «3» from the keyboard and complete the setting by pressing the «k»...
  • Page 81 To return to the main menu, click the top softkey (colored in blue). NOTE IF bandwidth can be set using the mouse (See IF Bandwidth Setting). Page 81...

  • Page 82: Number Of Traces, Measured Parameter And Display Format Setting

    Number of Traces, Measured Parameter and Display Format Setting In the current example, two traces are used for simultaneous display of the two parameters (SWR and reflection coefficient phase). To set the number of traces, use the following softkeys: Display > Num of Traces > 2 To return to the main menu, click the top softkey (colored in blue).
  • Page 83 Assign the S11-parameter to the second trace. This parameter is already assigned to the first trace by default. To assign a parameter to the trace, use the following softkeys: Measurement > S11 NOTE The measured parameter can be set using the mouse (See Measured Data Setting).
  • Page 84 The set parameters will be displayed in the trace status bar (See figure below). Settable parameters in the trace status field Page 84...

  • Page 85: Trace Scale Setting

    Trace Scale Setting For convenience of operation, change the trace scale using automatic scaling function (See Automatic Scaling). To set the scale of the active trace by the auto-scaling function, use the following softkeys: Scale > Auto Scale To return to the main menu, click the top softkey (colored in blue).

  • Page 86: Analyzer Calibration For Reflection Coefficient Measurement

    Analyzer Calibration for Reflection Coefficient Measurement Calibration of the entire measurement setup — which includes the Analyzer, cables, and adapters involved for the DUT connection — greatly enhances the accuracy of the measurement. To perform full one-port calibration, prepare the kit of calibration standards: OPEN, SHORT, and LOAD.
  • Page 87 Calibration kits list To perform full one-port calibration (SOL), execute measurements of the three standards in turn. After completion, the table of calibration coefficients will be calculated and saved into the memory of the Analyzer. Before starting calibration, disconnect the DUT from the Analyzer. To perform full one-port calibration, use the following softkeys: Calibration >...

  • Page 88: Swr And Reflection Coefficient Phase Analysis Using Markers

    SWR and Reflection Coefficient Phase Analysis Using Markers This section describes how to determine the measurement values at three frequency points using markers. The Analyzer screen view is shown the screen shot below. In the current example, a reflection standard of SWR = 1.2 is used as a DUT. SWR and reflection coefficient phase measurement example To create a new marker, use the following softkeys: Markers >...
  • Page 89 Then enter the frequency value in the input field in the graph, e.g. to enter frequency 200 MHz, press «2», «0», «0» and «M» keys on the keypad. Repeat the above procedure three times to enable three markers at different frequency points. By default, only active trace markers are displayed on the screen.

  • Page 90: User Interface

    User Interface The software on the PC screen is displayed as the Analyzer Screen. The Analyzer screen contains: · Channel windows to display measurement results in the form of traces and numerical values. · Menu bar Softkey bar to control the Analyzer. ·...

  • Page 91: Softkey Bar

    Softkey Bar The softkey bar is along the right side of the Analyzer screen and allows easy access to all software functions. The softkey bar consists of sub-levels organized in a hierarchical structure. Each sub-level contains a set of softkeys corresponding to the selected function of the Analyzer.
  • Page 92 In addition to «Esc», «Home» keys can be used to navigate the softkey bar: · « » key brings up the upper level of the bar. · « » key brings up the lower level of the bar, if there is a highlighted softkey with a right arrow.

  • Page 93: Menu Bar

    Menu Bar The drop-down menu bar is located at the top of the screen (See figure below). This is menu providing direct access to certain sub-levels of the softkey bar. It contains the most frequently used softkeys’ functions. Menu Bar The menu bar can be optionally hidden to gain more screen space for the channel window.

  • Page 94: Channel Window Layout And Functions

    Channel Window Layout and Functions The channel window displays the measurement results in the form of traces and numerical values. The screen can display up to 16 channel windows simultaneously. Each window corresponds to one channel. The Analyzer hardware processes channels sequentially.
  • Page 95 A channel is considered to be a separate logical analyzer with the following settings: · Stimulus signal settings: Frequency range Number of Points Sweep Type Power level · IF Bandwidth Average · Calibration Page 95...

  • Page 96: Channel Title Bar

    Channel Title Bar The channel title feature allows for a comment to be entered for each channel window. The channel title bar can be hidden to gain more screen space for the trace diagram. Channel title bar To show/hide the channel title bar, use the following softkeys: Display >...

  • Page 97: Trace Status Field

    Trace Status Field The trace status field displays the name and parameters of a trace. The number of lines in the field depends on the number of active traces in the channel. The trace status field is represented in the figure below. Trace status field Each line contains the data of one trace of the channel: ·...
  • Page 98 Status Symbols Definition OPEN response calibration SHORT response calibration THRU response calibration One-path two-port calibration Error Full one-port SOL calibration Correction Full two-port SOLT and TRL calibration Full three-port SOLT and TRL calibration Full four-port SOLT and TRL calibration Scalar mixer calibration Receiver calibration Other Calibrations...
  • Page 99 Status Symbols Definition Memory trace Data and memory traces OFF No indication Trace hold OFF Max Hold Hold the maximum value Trace Hold Min Hold Hold the minimum value Data + Memory D–M Data – Memory Math Operations Data * Memory Data / Memory Electrical Electrical delay other than zero...
  • Page 100 Status Symbols Definition Ytsh Transmission-shunt admittance Conj Conjugation NOTE Using the trace status field, the trace parameters can be easily modified using the mouse (as described in Quick Setting Using a Mouse). Page 100...

  • Page 101: Diagram

    Diagram The graph area in the channel window is called a diagram. The diagram displays traces and numeric data. Diagram The diagram contains the following elements: · Vertical graticule label displays the vertical axis numeric data for the active trace. The data for all traces can be displayed or hidden to gain more screen space for the trace display.
  • Page 102 · Current stimulus position indicator appears when sweep duration exceeds 1.5 sec. NOTE Using the diagram elements, the trace parameters can be easily modified using the mouse (as described in Quick Setting Using a Mouse). Page 102...

  • Page 103: Trace Layout In The Channel Window

    Trace Layout in the Channel Window If the number of the displayed traces is more than one, the traces can be rearranged. All the traces can be allocated to one diagram or each trace can be displayed on an individual diagram (See figures below). All traces in one diagram (example) Each trace on an individual diagram (example) Page 103...

  • Page 104: Markers

    Markers The markers indicate the stimulus values and the measured values at selected points of the trace (See figure below). Markers The markers are numbered from 1 to 15. The reference marker is indicated with an R symbol. The active marker is indicated in the following manners: ·...

  • Page 105: Channel Status Bar

    Channel Status Bar The channel status bar is located in the bottom part of the channel window (See figure below). Channel status bar It contains the following elements: · Sweep progress field displays a progress bar when the channel data is being updated.
  • Page 106 Symbol Definition Note Error correction is enabled. The stimulus settings are not the same for the measurement and the calibration. Extrapolation applied. Error correction is turned off. traces. White characters background. — No calibration data. No calibration was performed. · Receiver correction field displays the integrated status of receiver correction for absolute power measurement traces.
  • Page 107 Symbol Definition Note Power correction is enabled. The If the function is active for all stimulus settings are the same for traces — black characters on measurement a gray background. calibration. If the function is active only for some of the traces (other Power correction is enabled.
  • Page 108 Symbol Definition Linear frequency sweep. Logarithmic frequency sweep. Segm Segment frequency sweep. Power sweep. · IF bandwidth field allows for display and setting of the IF bandwidth. The values can be set from the instrument minimum up to 1 MHz for some models. For a detailed description, see IF Bandwidth Setting.

  • Page 109: Instrument Status Bar

    Instrument Status Bar The instrument status bar is located at the bottom of the screen. Instrument status bar Messages in the instrument status bar Field Message Instrument Status Note Description No communication between Not Ready DSP and PC. DSP status Loading DSP firmware is loading.
  • Page 110 Field Message Instrument Status Note Description detailed description, External External reference frequency ExtRef reference input (10 MHz) is turned on. Reference frequency Frequency Oscillator Selection. detailed Display description, Update Off Display update is turned OFF. update Screen Update Setting. detailed System System correction is turned description,...
  • Page 111 Field Message Instrument Status Note Description Port overload, stimulus signal output is turned OFF. detailed Port n Power Power Trip description, Trip at function Power Overload Trip Function. Measured cycle time detailed numeric value, Cycle Time description, Cycle Time Page 111...

  • Page 112: Setting Measurement Conditions

    Setting Measurement Conditions The section describes how to set the various measurement conditions of the Analyzer. To perform measurements, do the following according to each measurement task: · Set the required number of the channels, and their parameters. Set the required number of traces and their parameters for each channel.

  • Page 113: Channel And Trace Setting

    Channel and Trace Setting The Analyzer supports 16 channels, each of which allows for measurements with stimulus parameter settings different from the other channels. The parameters related to a channel are listed in the table below. Channel parameters Parameter Description Sweep Type Sweep Range Number of Points...
  • Page 114 Each channel window can contain up to 16 different traces. Each trace is assigned a measured parameter (S-parameter), display format, and other parameters. The parameters related to a trace are listed in the table below. Trace parameters Parameter Description Measured Parameter Display Format Scale Settings Electrical...

  • Page 115: Channel Allocation

    Channel Allocation A channel is represented on the screen as an individual channel window. The screen can display up to 16 channel windows simultaneously. By default, one channel window opens. If two or more channel windows need to be opened, one of the layouts shown below can be selected.
  • Page 116 To set the channel window layout, use the following softkeys: Display > Allocate Channels Then select the required number and layout of the channel windows in the menu. DISP:SPL Sets or reads out the number of the channel window layout on the screen.

  • Page 117: Number Of Traces

    Number of Traces Traces can be displayed in one diagram, overlapping each other, or in separate diagrams within a channel window (See figures below). Displaying two traces on the same Displaying two traces on two different diagram diagrams The trace settings are made in two steps: trace number and trace layout within the channel window.
  • Page 118 · By default, the display format for all traces is set to logarithmic magnitude (dB). For a detailed description of changing display format see Format Setting. · By default, the scale parameters are set as follows: division is set to 10 dB, reference level value is set to 0 dB, and the reference level position is in the middle of the diagram.

  • Page 119: Trace Allocation

    Trace Allocation By default, traces are displayed overlapping one other in the diagram. If you wish to display the traces in separate diagrams, the number and layout of the diagrams can be set in the channel window as shown below. Options for diagram placement in the channel Unlike channel windows, the number of traces and layout of the trace in diagrams are not related.
  • Page 120 Placing traces in a diagram: · If the number of traces and the number of diagrams is equal, all the traces will be displayed separately, each in an individual diagram. · If the number of traces is greater than the number of diagrams, traces will be assigned successively (beginning from the smallest trace number) to the number of available diagrams.
  • Page 121 · If the number of traces is smaller than the number of diagrams, empty diagrams will be displayed. Page 121...
  • Page 122 If two or more traces are displayed in one diagram, the vertical scale will be shown for the active trace. NOTE The Analyzer can optionally show vertical graticule labels for all the traces in the diagram. By default, this feature is disabled.
  • Page 123 If two or more traces are displayed in one diagram, markers data will be shown for the active trace. NOTE There are two options for displaying marker data for all the traces simultaneously: · Using the Marker Table Feature. · Deactivating identification of the active trace marker only, which is set by default.

  • Page 124: Selection Of Active Trace/Channel

    Selection of Active Trace/Channel The selected control commands are applied to the active channel or the active trace, respectively. The boundary line of the active channel window is highlighted in a light color. The active trace belongs to the active channel and its title is highlighted in an inverse color.
  • Page 125 To activate a trace/channel, use the following softkeys: Display > Active Trace/Channel Then activate the trace by entering the number in the Active Trace softkey or using Previous Trace or Next Trace softkeys. The active channel can be selected in a similar way. Sets the active channel.

  • Page 126: Trace/Channel Window Maximizing

    Trace/Channel Window Maximizing When there are several channel windows displayed, the active channel window can be temporarily expanded to full screen size. The other channel windows will not be visible, but this will not interrupt measurements in those channels. Active Channel/Trace Window Maximizing Page 126...
  • Page 127 Similarly, when there are several traces displayed in a channel window, the active trace can be temporarily expanded. The other traces will not be visible, but this will not interrupt measurement of those traces. To enable/disable active channel maximizing function, use the following softkeys: Display >...

  • Page 128: Stimulus Settings

    Stimulus Settings This section describes how to set the stimulus signal parameters. Stimulus — a signal with a known amplitude and phase, fed by the Analyzer to the device under test. The stimulus parameter settings apply to each channel. Before setting the stimulus parameters of a channel the channel must be made active (See Selection of Active Trace/Channel).

  • Page 129: Sweep Type

    Sweep Type The sweep type determines how the stimulus range is scanned: · By frequency (linear frequency sweeps, logarithmic frequency sweeps or segment sweep mode). · By power (linear power sweep). The channel to which the function is applied must be preselected as active (See Selection of Active Trace/Channel To set the sweep type, use the following softkeys: Stimulus >...

  • Page 130: Sweep Range

    Sweep Range The sweep range should be set for the linear and logarithmic frequency sweeps (Hz) and for the linear power sweep (dBm). The sweep range can be set using either Start/Stop or Center/Span values. The channel to which the function is applied must be preselected as active (See Selection of Active Trace/Channel).
  • Page 131 SENS:FREQ:SPAN Sets or reads out the stimulus span value of the sweep range for linear or logarithmic sweep type. SOUR:POW:CENT Sets or reads out the center value of the power sweep type. SOUR:POW:SPAN Sets or reads out the power span when the power sweep type is active.

  • Page 132: Number Of Points

    Number of Points The number of points is the number of measurements gathered in a sweep cycle in the range of stimulus change. The number of points should be set for the linear and logarithmic frequency sweeps, and for the linear power sweep. Increase the number of points to get a larger trace resolution.

  • Page 133: Stimulus Power

    Stimulus Power The stimulus power level should be set for the linear and logarithmic frequency sweeps. For the segment sweep type, the method of power level setting described in this section can be used only if the same power level is set for all the segments of the sweep.
  • Page 134 SOUR:POW:PORT Set or reads out the power level of each port for the frequency sweep type when the port couple feature is set to OFF by the SOUR:POW:PORT:COUP command. NOTE Setting the Power level is possible using the mouse (See Power Level/CW Frequency Setting).

  • Page 135: Power Slope Feature

    Power Slope Feature The power slope feature allows for compensation of power loss with increasing frequency in the connecting cables. The power slope can be set for the linear, logarithmic, and segment frequency sweep types. The channel to which the function is applied must be preselected as active (See Selection of Active Trace/Channel To enter the power slope value, use the following softkeys: Stimulus >...

  • Page 136: Cw Frequency

    CW Frequency The CW frequency setting determines the fixed frequency for the linear power sweep. The channel to which the function is applied must be preselected as active (See Selection of Active Trace/Channel To enter the CW frequency value, use the following softkeys: Stimulus >...

  • Page 137: Rf Out Function

    RF Out Function The RF Out function allows for temporary disabling of the stimulus signal. While the stimulus is disabled, measurements cannot be performed. To disable/enable stimulus, use the following softkeys: Stimulus > Power > RF Out Turns the RF signal output ON/OFF. OUTP NOTE The RF Out function is applied to the Analyzer, not to...

  • Page 138: Segment Table Editing

    Segment Table Editing The segment table determines the sweep parameters when segment sweep type is used (See Sweep Type). The channel to which the function is applied must be preselected as active (See Selection of Active Trace/Channel). To open the segment table, use the following softkeys: Stimulus >...
  • Page 139 To add a segment to the table, click the Add softkey. The new segment row will be entered below the highlighted one. To delete a segment, click the Delete softkey. The highlighted segment will be deleted. For any segment it is necessary to set the mandatory parameters: frequency range (start and stop) and number of points.
  • Page 140 To set a parameter, click on its value field and enter the value. To navigate in the table, use the keys on the keyboard. NOTE Adjacent segments must not overlap in the frequency domain. The segment table can be saved into *.SEG file to a hard disk and later recalled. To save the segment table, click the Save…...

  • Page 141: Measurement Delay

    Measurement Delay The measurement delay function allows for adding an additional time delay at each measurement point between the moment when the source output frequency becomes stable and the start of the measurement. This capability can be useful for measurements of electrically-long devices. The channel to which the function is applied must be preselected as active (See Selection of Active Trace/Channel To set the measurement delay time, use the following...

  • Page 142: Reverse Sweep Mode

    Reverse Sweep Mode By default, the stimulus sweep starts from the start value of sweep range and stops at the stop value. In the reverse sweep mode, the stimulus sweep starts from the stop value of sweep range and stops at the start value. The function applies to any sweep type (frequency, power, segment).

  • Page 143: Cw Time Sweep Mode

    CW Time Sweep Mode In the CW time sweep mode, the Analyzer displays measured data as a function of time when the stimulus frequency is fixed. This function is automatically turned on when the Stimulus Span is set to zero. The channel to which the function is applied must be preselected as active (See Selection of Active Trace/Channel To enable CW time sweep mode, set the Span value to...
  • Page 144 — hardware delay (depends on the Analyzer model and cannot be changed). The Analyzer automatically calculates the sweep time value based on the current settings: number of points, IF bandwidth, measurement delay. An arbitrary value can be set for sweep time, in this case, the Analyzer corrects the measurement delay value.
  • Page 145 The sweep time should not be confused with the measurement cycle time displayed in the Analyzer status bar (See Hide/Show Cycle Time). The table below shows the difference between sweep time and cycle time. Sweep Time value Cycle Time value Method Theoretically estimated Actually measured...

  • Page 146: Trigger Settings

    Trigger Settings This section describes the trigger settings. A trigger is a signal or event that starts the Analyzer measurement cycle. The measurement cycle, by default, includes the measurement of all opened channels. The Analyzer measures the channels sequentially one after another in one measurement cycle.

  • Page 147: Trigger State Diagram

    Trigger State Diagram The trigger system operates at two levels: at the Analyzer level and at the channel level. Analyzer States The Analyzer can be in one of the following three states: · Stop — the Analyzer waits for any channel to enter the Initiated state. ·...
  • Page 148 Channel states and transitions The table below describes the transitions between analyzer and channel states. Transition Condition Button Command Power on — — Preset SYST:PRESet, *RST To Stop Reset Trigger > ABORt Abort Restart current measurement cycle. Changing For example: example: Analyzer settings Stimulus...
  • Page 149 Transition Condition Button Command Trigger TRIG:SOUR INT Automatically, source > the trigger source is set to Internal. Internal Waiting Trigger –> Trigger TRIG:SOUR EXT Measurement At a signal arrival Cycle source > external trigger input, if the External trigger source is set to External.
  • Page 150 Transition Condition Button Command Trigger > At the end of a — Hold measurement cycle, when the Channels Measurement Continuous Cycle –> initiation mode is Stop disabled for all channels. same — — condition transition 1.1 To Hold Trigger > INIT:CONT OFF When Hold...
  • Page 151 Transition Condition Button Command At the — — channel measurement. Measurement –> Hold Average > TRIG:AVER If the averaging Avg Trigger trigger function is > On Repeat measurement measurement repeats N times, where averaging factor. Page 151...

  • Page 152: Trigger Source

    Trigger Source One of four trigger sources can be selected. This setting works at the Analyzer level. Trigger Function Source Internal The Analyzer generates a trigger signal automatically when needed. [default] External A trigger signal is a logic signal at the external trigger input (See External Trigger Settings).
  • Page 153 Trigger softkey generates the trigger in manual trigger mode. Stimulus > Trigger > Trigger Page 153...

  • Page 154: Channel Initiation Mode

    Channel Initiation Mode The channel initiation mode determines whether the channel will be included in the measurement cycle when a trigger signal is detected. The channel to which the function is applied must be preselected as active (See Selection of Active Trace/Channel Channel Function Initiation Mode...
  • Page 155 Stimulus > Trigger > Continuous All Channels INIT:CONT:ALL Turns the continuous initiation mode for all channels ON/OFF. Restart softkey aborts the sweep and transits the Analyzer to stop state, then if there are channels in the continuous initiation state the Analyzer transits to the waiting for a trigger state (See Trigger State Diagram).

  • Page 156: Trigger Scope

    Trigger Scope The trigger scope function selects whether all initiated channels or an active channel, if initiated, will be measured on a trigger condition. Trigger Scope Function All Channel All initiated channels will be measured on a trigger condition. [default] Active Channel Only the active channel, if initiated, will be measured on a trigger condition.

  • Page 157: Averaging Trigger

    Averaging Trigger The averaging trigger function allows for completing the averaging with a single trigger signal. This function affects the channels in which the averaging function is enabled (See Averaging Setting). Averaging Function Trigger One sweep is performed in response to one trigger signal regardless of the state of the channel averaging function.
  • Page 158 NOTE If multiple channels are open at the same time, one trigger signal starts a measurement cycle the required number of times for the channels with averaging on, and once for channels with averaging off. To enable/disable the averaging trigger function, use the following softkeys: Average >...

  • Page 159: External Trigger Settings

    External Trigger Settings This section describes settings of the external trigger. The logic signal at the Ext Trig In on the front panel of the Analyzer is an external trigger signal (See Front panel PXI). External Trigger Signal Input Connector To work with an external trigger: ·...

  • Page 160: External Trigger Event

    External Trigger Event This setting allows to select the external trigger event. Trigger event Function On sweep One trigger signal starts a full measurement cycle, that is, the measurement of all frequency points of all channels included in the measurement cycle. [default] On point One trigger signal starts the measurement of one...

  • Page 161: External Trigger Polarity

    External Trigger Polarity Trigger polarity Function Negative Edge The negative edge of the input signal of an external trigger is a trigger signal. [default] Positive Edge The positive edge of the input signal of an external trigger is a trigger signal. To select external trigger polarity, use the following softkeys: Stimulus >...

  • Page 162: External Trigger Position

    External Trigger Position The position of the external trigger determines the moment when the Analyzer expects an external trigger signal — before the frequency setup or before measuring (ADC sampling). The frequency setup precedes the measurement for each frequency point. Trigger Function Position...
  • Page 163 Trigger Function Position Before Setup, Point trigger is OFF Before Setup, Point trigger is ON NOTE This function is intended for use in conjunction with the On Point trigger function. In case of the On Sweep trigger function, the trigger position will be performed only for the first sweep point.

  • Page 164: External Trigger Delay

    External Trigger Delay The external trigger delay sets the response delay with respect to the external trigger signal (See figure below). The delay range and resolution see in datasheet. External Trigger Delay To set the external trigger delay, use the following softkeys: Stimulus >...

  • Page 165: External Trigger Route

    External Trigger Route The external trigger route selects the connector to use for the external trigger input in a PXI system. One of the 10 routes can be selected. To select the external trigger input connector, use the following softkeys: Stimulus >...

  • Page 166: Trigger Output

    Trigger Output This section describes settings of the trigger output. The trigger output is a special analyzer connector used to output a logical signal from the Analyzer. The trigger output is designed to synchronize external devices with the Analyzer measurement cycle.

  • Page 167: Enabling Trigger Output

    Enabling Trigger Output Trigger Output Function The trigger output is disabled. The trigger output is enabled. NOTE If the Ready for Trigger function is selected (See Trigger Output Function), the trigger source must be set to External to enable the trigger output (See Trigger Source).

  • Page 168: Trigger Output Polarity

    Trigger Output Polarity Trigger Output Function Polarity The negative edge of the signal at the trigger output Negative corresponds to the event. The positive edge of the signal at the trigger output Positive corresponds to the event. To select the polarity of the trigger output, use the following softkeys: Stimulus >...

  • Page 169: Trigger Output Function

    Trigger Output Function The purpose of the trigger output depends on the selected function. Trigger Output Function Function Before Setup Single pulse before setup frequency. Before Single pulse before sampling. Sampling After Sampling Single pulse after sampling. Indicates the ready for external trigger state. The signal position depends on the external trigger position setting.
  • Page 170 Trigger Output (except Ready for Trigger) Page 170...
  • Page 171 External Trigger set before sampling External trigger set before setup Trigger Output (Ready for Trigger only) To select the function of the trigger output, use the following softkeys: Stimulus > Trigger > Trigger Output > Function Then select the required function of the trigger output: ·...

  • Page 172: Trigger Output Route

    Trigger Output Route Trigger output route selects the connector to use for the trigger output in a PXI system. One of the 9 routes can be selected. To select the trigger output connector, use the following softkeys: Stimulus > Trigger > Trigger Output > Route Choose from: ·...

  • Page 173: Measurement Parameters Settings

    Measurement Parameters Settings This section describes the settings for the measurement parameter selection. The parameter selection applies to traces within a channel. The Analyzers allows for: · S-Parameter measurement (See S-Parameters). · Absolute power measurement at the receiver input (See Absolute Measurements).

  • Page 174: S-Parameters

    S-Parameters A measured S-parameter (S11, S21, S12, S22) is set for each trace. The trace to which the function is applied must be preselected as active (See Selection of Active Trace/Channel). For a detailed description of the principle of measuring S-parameters see in Principle of measuring S-parameters.

  • Page 175: Absolute Measurements

    Absolute Measurements Absolute measurements are measurements of the absolute power of a signal at a receiver input. Unlike relative measurements of S-parameters, which represent a relation between the signals at inputs of two receivers, absolute measurements determine the signal power at the input of one receiver. A two-port Analyzer has four independent receivers: A, B, R1, R2 (See figure below).
  • Page 176 Symbols Definition R2(1) Reference signal receiver R2 (Source Port 1) R2(2) Reference signal receiver R2 (Source Port 2) A measured absolute parameter is set for each trace. The trace to which the function is applied must be preselected as active (See Selection of Active Trace/Channel).
  • Page 177 NOTE In absolute measurement mode, dBm measurement units are used for logarithmic magnitude format, and W measurement units are used in linear magnitude format. Other formats applicable absolute measurements. Page 177...

  • Page 178: Format Setting

    Format Setting The format setting determines how measured data will be presented on the diagram. The Analyzer offers three S-parameter measurement display types: · Rectangular format · Polar format · Smith chart format Page 178...

  • Page 179: Rectangular Formats

    Rectangular Formats In this format, stimulus values are plotted along X-axis and the measured data are plotted along Y-axis (See figure below). Rectangular format To display complex-valued S-parameters along the scalar Y-axis, it must be transformed into a real number. Rectangular formats involve various types of transformation of an S-parameter where —...
  • Page 180 Rectangular Formats Format Type Label Data Type (Y-axis) Measurement Description Unit (Y-axis) Log Mag Logarithmic S-parameter logarithmic Decibel (dB) Magnitude magnitude: Voltage Dimensionless Standing value Wave Ratio Phase Phase S-parameter phase from – Degree (°) 180° to +180°: Expand Expanded S-parameter phase, Degree (°)
  • Page 181 To choose a rectangular format, use the following softkey: Format Then select the desired format: · Logarithmic magnitude · · Phase · Expanded phase · Group delay · Linear magnitude · Real part · Imaginary part Sets or reads out the trace format. CALC:FORM NOTE The display format can be set using the mouse (See...

  • Page 182: Polar Format

    Polar Format The Polar format is used to display the amplitude and phase of the reflection coefficient ( ) when measuring S11 or S22. The complex reflection coefficient values are displayed on the polar diagram in the complex plane. The complex plane is formed by the real horizontal and the imaginary vertical axes.
  • Page 183 NOTE On circular diagrams (Polar and Smith chart), any point of the trace can be defined in the following two ways (See figure below): · Coordinates of the point (Re, Im) on the real and imaginary coordinate axes. · Parameters of the vector directed to the point from the center of the diagram.
  • Page 184 The Polar format diagram with the characteristic points is shown in the figure below. Properties of Polar format Basic properties of the Polar format: · The center of the diagram corresponds to the reflection coefficient (reference impedance Z0 on the input test port of the DUT when measuring S11, S22, matched circuit, no reflection).
  • Page 185 The polar graph does not have a frequency axis, so frequency is indicated by markers. There are three types of polar formats corresponding to the data displayed by the marker; the traces remain the same for all the format types (See table below). Format Type Label Data...
  • Page 186 Sets or reads out the trace format. CALC:FORM NOTE The display format can be set using the mouse (See Display Format Setting). Page 186...

  • Page 187: Smith Chart Format

    Smith Chart Format The Smith chart is a circular chart on which the measured complex reflection coefficients (S11, S22) are compared with the normalized impedance of the DUT. The Smith chart is formed from a rectilinear impedance plane by collapsing the area with positive resistance into a single unit circle (See figure below).
  • Page 188 NOTE On circular diagrams (Polar and Smith chart), any point of the trace can be defined in the following two ways (See figure below): · Coordinates of the point (Re, Im) on the real and imaginary coordinate axes. · Parameters of the vector directed to the point from the center of the diagram.
  • Page 189 · At the rightmost point of the horizontal axis, the impedance has an infinitely large value (Open circuited load). · At the leftmost point of the horizontal axis, the impedance value is zero (Short circuited load). · The outer circle of the diagram at scale = 1 (or unit circle) corresponds to a zero resistance value (reactance only).
  • Page 190 Smith chart properties Inverse Smith Chart (Complex Admittance) The Inverse Smith chart is a circular chart on which the measured complex reflection coefficients (S11, S22) are compared with the normalized DUT admittance. Complex admittance is the inverse of complex impedance. To build an Inverse Smith chart, mirror the Smith chart on the horizontal axis (See figure below).
  • Page 191 Convert Smith Chart to Inverse Smith Chart Basic properties of the Inverse Smith chart: · Each point on the diagram is equivalent to the complex conductance of the DUT: where — real part of conductivity (conductance), — imaginary part of conductivity (susceptance).
  • Page 192 NOTE Position of the unit circle at a scale greater than 1 · The upper and lower halves of the diagram correspond to the negative (inductive) and positive (capacitive) reactive components (admittance). · The reflection coefficient display ( ) on the Inverse Smith chart coincides with its display on the Smith chart.
  • Page 193 Format Type Label Data Displayed Measurement Description Marker Unit Logarithmic S-parameter logarithmic Decibel (dB) Magnitude and magnitude Smith Phase (Log) S-parameter phase Degree (°) Real S-parameter real part Dimensionless Imaginary value Smith Parts (Re/Im) S-parameter imaginary Dimensionless part value Complex Resistance at input: Ohm ( ) Impedance...
  • Page 194 Format Type Label Data Displayed Measurement Description Marker Unit Complex Conductance at input: Siemens (S) admittance (at Input) Susceptance at input: Siemens (S) Smith (G + Equivalent capacitance or Farad (F) inductance: Henry (H) Z0 — test port impedance. Z0 setting is described in System Impedance The format for each trace of the channel can be selected individually.
  • Page 195 Sets or reads out the trace format. CALC:FORM NOTE The display format can be set using the mouse (See Display Format Setting). Page 195...

  • Page 196: Scale Settings

    Scale Settings The section describes how to set the scale for the different available formats. The scale setting options depend on the selected data display format: rectangular format or circular format. For a detailed description of the scale settings for the different formats, see Rectangular Scale Circular Scale (Polar and...

  • Page 197: Rectangular Scale

    Rectangular Scale rectangular format, the following parameters can be set (See figure below): · scale division · reference level value · reference level position · number of scale divisions Rectangular scale The scale of each trace can be set independently. The trace to which the function is applied must be preselected as active (See Selection of Active Trace/Channel).
  • Page 198 To set the scale of a trace, use the following softkeys: Scale > Scale Sets or reads out the trace scale. Sets the scale DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:PDIV per division. To set the reference level, use the following softkeys: Scale > Ref Value DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV Sets the value of the reference line (response value on the reference line).

  • Page 199: Circular Scale

    Circular Scale Polar formats Smith chart formats, the outer circle value can be set (See figure below). Circular Scale The scale of each trace can be set independently. The trace to which the function is applied must be preselected as active (See Selection of Active Trace/Channel To set the scale of the circular graphs, use the following softkeys:...

  • Page 200: Automatic Scaling

    Automatic Scaling The automatic scaling function automatically adjusts the trace scale so that the trace of the measured value fits into the diagram entirely. In rectangular format, two parameters are adjustable: scale division and reference level position. In circular format, the outer circle value is adjusted. The function can be applied to the active trace or to all traces of the active channel.

  • Page 201: Reference Level Automatic Selection

    Reference Level Automatic Selection This function automatically selects the reference level in rectangular coordinates. After selection, the trace of the measured value shifts vertically so that the reference level crosses the trace in the middle. The scale division is unaffected. The function can be applied to the active trace or to all traces of the active channel.

  • Page 202: Automatic Reference Level Tracking

    Automatic Reference Level Tracking The automatic reference level tracking function tracks the reference level of a trace. When enabled, the trace reference level is updated with each scan according to the selected method: maximum, minimum, center, or according to the value of the active marker.

  • Page 203: Electrical Delay Setting

    Electrical Delay Setting The electrical delay function compensates for the electrical delay of the trace measurement. This function is useful during measurements of phase deviations from linear, for example. If the electrical delay setting is other than zero, the S-parameter value will be corrected in accordance with the following formula: where —...
  • Page 204 To set the electrical delay to an equivalent length, use the following softkeys: Scale > Electrical Delay > Distance CALC:CORR:EDEL:DIST Sets or reads out the value of the equivalent distance in the electrical delay function. To set the units of equivalent length, use the following softkeys: Scale >...
  • Page 205 To enter the WG Cutoff value, use the following softkeys: Scale > Electrical Delay > WG Cutoff CALC:CORR:EDEL:WAV:CUT Sets or reads out the value of the waveguide cutoff frequency in the electrical delay function if the type of media set to the WAVeguide command CALC:CORR:EDEL:MED.

  • Page 206: Phase Offset Setting

    Phase Offset Setting The phase offset function adds the constant offset to the phase of a trace. The value of the phase offset is set in degrees for each trace independently. The trace must be activated before setting the phase offset. To set the phase offset, use the following softkeys: Scale >...

  • Page 207: Measurement Optimization

    Measurement Optimization This section describes ways to optimize the measurement: · Narrowing the IF bandwidth of measurement receivers increases the signal-to- noise ratio and extends the dynamic range of measurements. This increases the value of the sweep time. For a detailed description, see bandwidth.

  • Page 208: If Bandwidth Setting

    IF Bandwidth Setting The IF bandwidth setting selects the bandwidth of the receivers. The IF bandwidth value takes value from the following series: 1 Hz, 1.5 Hz, 2 Hz, 3 Hz, 5 Hz, 7 Hz, 10 Hz, 15 Hz, 20 Hz ... 1 MHz, 2 MHz. Narrowing the IF bandwidth increases the signal-to-noise ratio and extends the dynamic range of measurements.

  • Page 209: Averaging Setting

    Averaging Setting Averaging of each measurement point is performed over several sweeps. The benefits of the averaging function are similar to those of IF bandwidth narrowing. It increases the signal-to-noise ratio and extends the dynamic range of measurements. Averaging of each measurement point is made across multiple sweeps in accordance with the following formula: where —...
  • Page 210 The averaging should be set for each channel individually. The channel to which the function is applied must be preselected as active (See Selection of Active Trace/Channel To toggle the averaging function ON/OFF, use the following softkeys: Average > Averaging [ON | OFF] Turns the measurement averaging function ON/OFF.

  • Page 211: Averaging Trigger

    Averaging Trigger The averaging trigger function allows for completing the averaging with a single trigger signal. This function affects the channels in which the averaging function is enabled (See Averaging Setting). Averaging Function Trigger One sweep is performed in response to one trigger signal regardless of the state of the channel averaging function.
  • Page 212 NOTE If multiple channels are open at the same time, one trigger signal starts a measurement cycle the required number of times for the channels with averaging on, and once for channels with averaging off. To enable/disable the averaging trigger function, use the following softkeys: Average >...

  • Page 213: Smoothing Setting

    Smoothing Setting Smoothing averages the adjacent points of the trace by the moving window. The window aperture is set as a percent of the total number of trace points. Smoothing does not increase the dynamic range of the Analyzer, nor does it increase measurement time.

  • Page 214: Quick Settings Using A Mouse

    Quick Settings Using a Mouse This section describes mouse operations, which allows to set the channel parameters quickly and easily. In a channel window, when hovering over the field where a channel parameter can be modified, the mouse pointer will change its icon to indicate edit mode.
  • Page 215 Quick Parameter Setting on the Channel Status Bar Quick Parameter Setting on Markers Page 215...

  • Page 216: Active Channel Selection

    Active Channel Selection The active channel can be selected when two or more channel windows are open. The border line of the active window will be highlighted in a light color. To activate another window, click inside its area. Active Trace/Channel Selection The active channel can be selected using softkeys (See Selection of Active Trace/Channel).

  • Page 217: Active Trace Selection

    Active Trace Selection The active trace can be selected if the active channel window contains two or more traces. The active trace name is highlighted. To activate a trace, click on the required trace status line, or on any item (trace, marker) having the same color. Active Trace Selection Active trace can be selected using softkeys (See Selection of Active...

  • Page 218: Measured Parameter Setting

    Measured Parameter Setting To assign the measured parameters (S11, S21, S12 or S22) to a trace, click on the S-parameter name in the trace status line and select the required parameter in the drop-down menu. Measured Parameter Setting Measured data can be set using softkeys (See S-Parameters). Page 218...

  • Page 219: Display Format Setting

    Display Format Setting To select the trace display format, click on the display format field in the trace status line and select the desired format in the drop-down menu. Display Format Setting The display format can be set using softkeys (See Format Setting).

  • Page 220: Trace Scale Setting

    Trace Scale Setting The trace scale, also known as the vertical scale division value, can be set by either of two methods. The first method: click on the trace scale field in the trace status line and enter the required numerical value. Trace scale setting in the trace status line The second method: move the mouse pointer over the vertical scale until the pointer icon becomes as shown in the figure.

  • Page 221: Reference Level Setting

    Reference Level Setting The value of the reference level, which is indicated on the vertical scale by the « » and « » symbols, can be set by either of two methods. The first method: click on the reference level field in the trace status line and enter the required numerical value.

  • Page 222: Reference Level Position

    Reference Level Position The reference level position, indicated on the vertical scale by « » and « » symbols, can be set in the following way: Locate the mouse pointer on a reference level symbol until it becomes as shown in the figure, then drag and drop the reference level symbol to the desired position.

  • Page 223: Sweep Start Setting

    Sweep Start Setting Move the mouse pointer over the stimulus scale until it becomes as shown in the figure. The pointer should be placed in the left part of the scale, at approximately 10% of the scale length from the left. Left click and drag right to increase the sweep start value or left to reduce the value.

  • Page 224: Sweep Stop Setting

    Sweep Stop Setting Move the mouse pointer over the stimulus scale until it becomes as shown in the figure. The pointer should be placed in the right part of the scale, at approximately 10% of the scale length from the right. Left click and drag right to increase the sweep stop value or left to reduce the value.

  • Page 225: Sweep Center Setting

    Sweep Center Setting Move the mouse pointer over the stimulus scale until it becomes as shown in the figure. The pointer should be placed in the center part of the scale. Left click and drag right to increase the sweep center value or left to reduce the value. Sweep center setting on the stimulus scale The center value of the sweep range can be set using softkeys (See Sweep...

  • Page 226: Sweep Span Setting

    Sweep Span Setting Move the mouse pointer over the stimulus scale until it becomes as shown in the figure. The pointer should be placed in the center part of the scale, at approximately 20% of the scale length from the right Left click and drag to the right to increase the sweep span value, or to the left to reduce the value.

  • Page 227: Switching Between Start/Center And Stop/Span Modes

    Switching Between Start/Center and Stop/Span Modes To switch between the modes, Start/Center and Stop/Span, click on the respective field of the channel status bar. Clicking the label «Start» changes it to «Center», and the label «Stop» will change to «Span». Switching between Start/Center and Stop/Span modes in channel status bar The layout of the stimulus scale will be changed correspondingly.

  • Page 228: Start/Center Value Setting

    Start/Center Value Setting To enter the Start/Center values, activate the respective field in the channel status bar by clicking the numerical value. Setting the Start/Center value in the channel status bar The Start/Center values can be set using softkeys (See Sweep Range).

  • Page 229: Stop/Span Value Setting

    Stop/Span Value Setting To enter the Stop/Span values, activate the respective field in the channel status bar by clicking the numerical value. Setting the Stop/Span value in the channel status bar The Stop/Span values can be set using softkeys (See Sweep Range).

  • Page 230: Number Of Points Setting

    Number of Points Setting To enter the number of points, activate the respective field in the channel status bar by clicking the numerical value. Setting the number of points value in the channel status bar The number of points can be set using softkeys (See Number of Points).

  • Page 231: Sweep Type Setting

    Sweep Type Setting To set the sweep type, left click on the respective field in the channel status bar and select the required type in the drop-down menu. Setting the sweet type value in the channel status bar The sweep type can be selected using softkeys (See Sweep Type).

  • Page 232: If Bandwidth Setting

    IF Bandwidth Setting IF bandwidth can be set by selection in the drop-down menu, or by entering the value using numerical keys of the keyboard. To activate the drop-down menu, right click on the IF bandwidth field in the channel status bar.

  • Page 233: Power Level/Cw Frequency Setting

    Power Level/CW Frequency Setting To enter the Power Level/CW Frequency, activate the respective field in the channel status bar by clicking the numerical value. The parameter displayed in the field depends on the current sweep type: in frequency sweep mode, the power level value can be entered;...

  • Page 234: Marker Stimulus Value Setting

    Marker Stimulus Value Setting The marker stimulus value can be set by either a click and drag operation, or by entering the value using numerical keys of the keyboard. To drag the marker, first move the mouse pointer on one of the marker indicators until it becomes as shown in the figures below: Setting the marker value using drag and drop To enter the numerical value of the stimulus, activate its field by clicking it in the...

  • Page 235: Calibration And Calibration Kits

    Calibration and Calibration Kits Measurement accuracy is affected by errors introduced by the Analyzer and measurement setup. The nature of these errors is varied — some are systematically repeated, and some are random. Calibration is a process used to evaluate systematically repeated errors and mathematically exclude them from the measurement results in the correction process.

  • Page 236: General Information

    General Information This section details general information about calibration: · Guidelines for calibration (See Basic Calibration Guidelines). · Description of measurement errors (See Measurement Errors). · Error models (See Error Model). · Calibration steps (See Calibration Steps). Page 236...

  • Page 237: Basic Calibration Guidelines

    Basic Calibration Guidelines Follow the guidelines below to perform calibration correctly and reduce accidental errors. Observance of the guidelines will ensure the specified accuracy of the device. General Guidelines · Select all fixtures for connecting the DUT and assemble the measuring setup before starting the calibration.
  • Page 238 · If an additional component (cable, attenuator, adapter) is added to the measurement setup after calibration, recalibrate. Instead of recalibration, it is possible to use the de-embedding function or the port extension function to compensate for the added electrical length (delay) and losses. Recommendations for Reducing Random Measurement Errors ·...

  • Page 239: Measurement Errors

    Measurement Errors S-parameter measurements are influenced by various measurement errors, which can be broken down into two categories: · systematic errors · random errors Random errors comprise errors such as noise fluctuations and thermal drift in electronic components, changes in the mechanical dimensions of cables and connectors subject to temperature drift, repeatability of connections, and cable bends.

  • Page 240: Systematic Errors

    Systematic Errors The systematic measurement errors of the Analyzer are divided into the following categories according to their source: · directivity · source match · load match · reflection tracking · transmission tracking · isolation The measurement results before error correction are called uncorrected. The residual values of the systematic measurement errors after error correction are called effective.
  • Page 241 Source Match Error A source match error (Es) is caused by a mismatch between the source port and the input of the DUT. In this case, part of the signal reflected by the DUT reflects at the source port and re-enters the input of the DUT. The error affects both reflection measurement and transmission measurement.
  • Page 242 Load Match Error A load match error (El) is caused by a mismatch between the receiver port and the output of the DUT. In this case, part of the signal transmitted through the DUT reflects at the receiver port and returns to the output of the DUT. The error occurs during transmission measurements and reflection measurements (for a two-port DUT).
  • Page 243 Reflection Tracking Error A reflection tracking error (Er) is caused by differences in frequency response between the test receiver and the reference receiver of the source port during reflection measurement. Reflection tracking error Page 243...
  • Page 244 Transmission Tracking Error A transmission tracking error (Et) is caused by differences in frequency response between the test receiver of the receiver port and the reference receiver of the source port during transmission measurement. Transmission tracking error Page 244...
  • Page 245 Isolation Error Isolation error (Ex) is caused by a leakage of the signal from the source port to the receiver port bypassing the DUT. The Analyzer has very good isolation, which allows us to ignore this error for most measurements. Isolation error measurement is an optional step in all types of calibration.

  • Page 246: Error Model

    Error Model The error model in the form of signal (directed) graphs is used to analyze systematic errors of the Analyzer. This section describes following error models: · One-Port Error Model · Two-Port Error Model Page 246...

  • Page 247: One-Port Error Model

    One-Port Error Model Only one port of the Analyzer is used when performing reflection measurements. The signal flow graph of errors for Port 1 is represented in the figure below. For Port 2, the signal flow graph of the errors will be similar. a —...

  • Page 248: Two-Port Error Model

    Two-Port Error Model There are two signal flow graphs considered for two-port measurements. One of the graphs describes the case where Port 1 is the stimulus source, the other graph describes the case where Port 2 is the stimulus source. The signal flow graphs of error effects in a two-port system are represented in the figure below.
  • Page 249 These terms are also described in the table below. Description Stimulus Source Port 1 Port 2 Directivity Source match Reflection tracking Transmission tracking Load match Isolation After determining all twelve error terms for each measurement frequency by means of a two-port calibration, it is possible to calculate the actual value of the S- parameters: S11a, S21a, S12a, S22a.

  • Page 250: Analyzer Test Port Definition

    Analyzer Test Port Definition The test ports of the Analyzer are defined by means of calibration. The test port is a connector accepting a calibration standard in the process of calibration. A type-N, 3.5 mm NMD, 2.4 mm NMD or 1.85 mm NMD connector on the front panel of the Analyzer will be the test port if calibration standards are connected directly to it.
  • Page 251 The term calibration plane is used in some cases. The calibration plane is an imaginary plane located at the ends of the connectors, which accept calibration standards during calibration. Calibration planes Page 251...

  • Page 252: Calibration Steps

    Calibration Steps The process of calibration comprises the following steps: · Selection of a calibration kit matching the connector type of the test port (See Calibration Standards and Calibration Kits). The calibration kit includes such standards as SHORT, OPEN, and LOAD with matched impedance. Magnitude and phase responses i.e.

  • Page 253: Calibration Standards And Calibration Kits

    Calibration Standards and Calibration Kits Calibration standard Calibration standards are precision physical devices that serve as a calibration standard for the Analyzer. Calibration standards have their own specific type, specific gender, specific impedance, standard definition. Calibration standard belongs to one or several classes.

  • Page 254: Types Of Calibration Standards

    Types of Calibration Standards Calibration standard type is a category of physical devices used to define the parameters of the standard. The Analyzer supports the following types of the calibration standards: · OPEN · SHORT · FIXED LOAD · SLIDING LOAD ·...

  • Page 255: Gender Of Calibration Standard

    Gender of Calibration Standard Gender of a calibration standard is typically denoted on the calibration standard label. The label and the gender of calibration standard respectively, are not accounted by the software and are used for information only. Nevertheless, it is recommended to follow some rules for calibration standard gender designation.

  • Page 256: Calibration Kit Management

    Calibration Kit Management This section describes how to edit the calibration kit description, to add and delete a calibration kit. The Analyzer provides a table for 64 calibration kits. The first part of the table contains the predefined kits. The second part of the table is for calibration kit added by the user.

  • Page 257: Calibration Kit Selection

    Calibration Kit Selection The calibration kit employed during a calibration should be selected according to the following procedure. If it is not specified in the list of the predefined calibration kits, it should be added. The procedure of adding and editing of the calibration kits is described in Calibration Kit Management.

  • Page 258: Operations On Table Of Calibration Kits

    Operations on Table of Calibration Kits The table of calibration kits (See figure below) allows for selecting and editing of the calibration kits. Table of calibration kits To open the list of the calibration kits (See figure below), use the following softkeys: Calibration >...
  • Page 259 The table also contains display-only fields: flags of predefined and modified calibration kits and the counter of the calibration standards in a kit. Calibration Kit Selection for Editing Move the highlighting to the required line in the calibration kit (See figure above) table using “...
  • Page 260 NOTE A predefined calibration kit can be restored but cannot be erased. User-Defined Calibration Kit Deletion Move the highlighting to the required line in the calibration kit (See above figure). To delete a user-defined calibration kit from the table, use the following softkey: Erase Cal Kit NOTE...
  • Page 261 Loading Calibration Kit from File Calibration kit files that were created by the previous command can be loaded. Move the highlighting to the required line in the calibration kit (See above figure). To load a calibration kit form file, click the following softkey: Load from File…...

  • Page 262: Calibration Standard Definition

    Calibration Standard Definition The definitions of the calibration standards included in one calibration kit are listed in the table as shown below Calibration standard definition table for the standards defined by the model The Analyzer provides two methods of defining a calibration standard: ·...
  • Page 263 Standard Adding to Calibration Kit To add a calibration standard to the table of calibration standard definition (See figure above), use the following softkey: Calibration > Cal Kit > Define STDs > Add STD SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:STAN:INS Inserts the calibration standard into the selected calibration kit.
  • Page 264 · Load · Thru/Line · Unknown Thru · Sliding Load · Data-Based Label Standard labels specified on the calibration menu softkeys. F min Minimum operating frequency of the coaxial standard. Lower cutoff frequency of the waveguide standard. F max Maximum operating frequency of the coaxial standard.
  • Page 265 the standard with the help of the calibration standard model. C0 10–15 F For an OPEN standard, C0 coefficient in the polynomial formula of the fringe capacitance: C1 10–27 F/Hz For an OPEN standard, C1 coefficient in the polynomial formula of the fringe capacitance. C2 10–36 F/Hz For an OPEN standard, C2 coefficient in the polynomial formula of the fringe capacitance.
  • Page 266 SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:STAN:FMIN Sets or reads out the minimum frequency limit of the calibration standard. SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:STAN:FMAX Sets or reads out the maximum frequency limit of the calibration standard. SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:STAN:DEL Sets or reads out the offset delay value for the calibration standard. SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:STAN:Z0 Sets or reads out the offset Z0 value for the calibration standard.
  • Page 267 SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:STAN:L3 Sets or reads out the L3 value for the short calibration standard. Calibration Standard Copy/Paste Function To save a calibration standard into clipboard, highlight the required line in the calibration standard definition table, and click the following softkey: Copy STD or Copy All STDs To paste the standard(s) from the clipboard, click the following softkey: Paste...
  • Page 268 Management of Sequence in Standard Table To change the sequence in the table, use the following softkeys: STD Up or STD Down Page 268...

  • Page 269: Calibration Standard Model

    Calibration Standard Model A model of a calibration standard presented as an equivalent circuit is used for determining S-parameters of the standard. The model is employed for standards of OPEN, SHORT, FIXED LOAD, THRU/LINE types. A one-port model is used for the standards OPEN, SHORT and FIXED LOAD (See Full One-Port Calibration).
  • Page 270 Parameters of the calibration standard equivalent circuit model Parameter (as in the Parameter Definition software) The characteristic impedance of the transmission line [Ω], serving as the offset. (Offset Z0) For the coaxial line specified real value of characteristic impedance, usually equal to 50 Ω or 75 Ω. For waveguide calibration, the special value of 1 Ω...
  • Page 271 Parameter (as in the Parameter Definition software) independently of line type, dielectric, presence of propagation speed dispersion. The Multiline TRL uses for calculations physical length of lines. Rloss The offset loss in one-way propagation due to the skin effect [Ω/sec]. (Offset Loss) The loss in a coaxial transmission line is determined by measuring the delay T [sec] and loss L [dB] at 1 GHz...
  • Page 272 Parameter (as in the Parameter Definition software) Units: C0[F], C1[F/Hz], C2[F/Hz ], C3[F/Hz The residual inductance of a SHORT standard, which causes a phase offset of the reflection coefficient at high frequencies. residual inductance model (L0, L1, L2, L3) described as a function of frequency, which is a polynomial of the third degree: , where —...

  • Page 273: Data-Based Calibration Standards

    Data-Based Calibration Standards The calibration standards defined by data are set using the table of S-parameters. Each line of the table contains frequency and S-parameters of the calibration standard. For one-port standards the table contains the value of only one parameter —...
  • Page 274 from a file, or the user will be requested to specify the type if the data is entered by the user. The data in the table can be represented in three formats according to the user settings: · Real part and Imaginary part. ·...
  • Page 275 Table Format Selection To select the format of the table of the calibration standard S- parameters (See above figure), use the following softkey: Format > Real/Imag | Magn/Angle | MLog/Angle Port Reversing To enable/disable reversing of the ports of a two-port standard, use the following softkey: Reverse Ports Loading Data from File...

  • Page 276: Scope Of Calibration Standard Definition

    Scope of Calibration Standard Definition Different methods of calibration apply either full or partial definitions of the calibration standards. The full two-port calibration, full one-port calibration, one-path two-port calibration, and normalization use fully defined calibration standards, i.e. the standards with known S-parameters.

  • Page 277: Classes Of Calibration Standards

    Classes of Calibration Standards Along with defining a calibration standard by a calibration model or data, the standard should also be assigned a specific class. One calibration standard may belong to several classes. The class assignment is performed for each particular calibration kit.
  • Page 278 NOTE The class assignment changes the labels of the calibration standards on the calibration softkeys. The assignment of classes to the standards of the selected calibration kit is made in the table of standard classes (See figure below). Table of calibration standard classes Standard labels populate the table cells by selecting them from the list of calibration kit standards.
  • Page 279 Using more than one subclass allows to: · Postpone the selection of standards of the same class available in the calibration kit to the calibration stage. It is possible to select between male and female standards, FLUSH THRU and UNKNOWN THRU. ·...
  • Page 280 used for the measurement between the specified ports. SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:ORD:TRLL Sets or reads out the number of the calibration standard of the TRL LINE type used for the measurement between the specified ports. SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:ORD:TRLT Sets or reads out the number of the calibration standard of the TRL THRU type used for the measurement...

  • Page 281: Strict Class Assignment Function

    Strict Class Assignment Function This function allows for limitation of the one standard type(s) available in each class by the feature of strict correspondence (See table below). If this function is disabled, any class can be assigned to the standard. N Standard Class Standard Type Open,...
  • Page 282 To disable/enable the function of strict class correspondence function, use the following softkey: Strict Assign Page 282...

  • Page 283: Group Assignment Of Port Number Function

    Group Assignment of Port Number Function This function allows for automatic assignment of one standard to all the ports of a specific class when assigned to at least one port. To enable/disable the function of group assignment of port number, use the following softkey: Assign Same STDs to All Ports Page 283...

  • Page 284: Subclasses Of Calibration Standards

    Subclasses of Calibration Standards Subclasses are used to assign one class to several calibration standards. The procedure of subclass assignment is mainly employed for calibration within a wide frequency range by several calibration standards, each of which does not cover the full frequency range.

  • Page 285: Calibration Methods And Procedures

    Calibration Methods and Procedures The Analyzer supports several methods of one-port and two-port calibration. The calibration methods vary by quantity and type of the standards being used, by type of error correction, and accuracy. The table below presents an overview of calibration methods.
  • Page 286 Calibration Parameters Standards Errors Accuracy Method · 2 LOADs optional isolation calibration is performed) · Full Two-Port S11, S21 Er1, Ed1, High SHORT Calibration Es1, Et1, El1, Ex1 S12, S22 · OPEN Er2, Ed2, · LOAD Es2, Et2, El2, Ex2 ·...

  • Page 287: Reflection Normalization

    Reflection Normalization Reflection normalization is the simplest calibration method used for reflection coefficient measurements (S11 or S22). Measurement of one standard (SHORT or OPEN) is enough to perform this type of calibration (See figure below). This method is called normalization because the measured S-parameter at each frequency point is divided (normalized) by the corresponding S-parameter of the calibration standard.
  • Page 288 SENS:CORR:COLL:SAVE command. Selects the port and sets the response SENS:CORR:COLL:METH:SHOR calibration (Short) type for the calculation calibration coefficients completion of the calibration executed by SENS:CORR:COLL:SAVE command. Connect an OPEN or a SHORT standard to the test port as shown in above figure. Perform measurement using the Open or Short softkey respectively.
  • Page 289 on the selected calibration type. To clear the measurement results of the standards, click Cancel. This softkey does not cancel the current calibration. To disable the current calibration turn off the error correction function (See Error Correction Disabling). SENS:CORR:COLL:CLE Clears the measurement data of the calibration standards.

  • Page 290: Transmission Normalization

    Transmission Normalization Transmission normalization is the simplest calibration method used for transmission coefficient measurements (S21 or S12). Measurement of one THRU standard is enough to perform this type of calibration (See figure below). This method is called normalization because the measured S-parameter at each frequency point is divided (normalized) by the corresponding S-parameter of the calibration standard.
  • Page 291 To open transmission normalization submenu, use the following softkeys: Calibration > Calibrate > Response (Thru) Select the direction of the calibration using the Select Ports softkey. The label on the softkey indicates the following: receiver port — source port (measured parameter). Selects the ports and sets the response SENS:CORR:COLL:METH:THRU calibration (Thru) type for the calculation of...
  • Page 292 To complete the calibration procedure, click Apply softkey. This will activate the process of calibration coefficient table calculation and saving it into the memory. The error correction function will also be automatically enabled. SENS:CORR:COLL:SAVE Calculates the calibration coefficients from the calibration standards measurements depending on the selected calibration type.

  • Page 293: Full One-Port Calibration

    Full One-Port Calibration Full one-port calibration (SOL) is used for reflection coefficient measurements (S11 or S22). The three calibration standards (SHORT, OPEN, LOAD) are measured (See figure below) in the process of this calibration. Measurement of the three standards allows for acquisition of all the three error terms (Ed, Es, and Er) of a one- port model.
  • Page 294 completion of the measurement, a check mark will appear in the left part of the softkey. SENS:CORR:COLL:OPEN Measures the calibration data of the open standard for the specified port. SENS:CORR:COLL:SHOR Measures the calibration data of the short standard for the specified port. SENS:CORR:COLL:LOAD Measures the calibration data of the load standard for the specified port.

  • Page 295: One-Path Two-Port Calibration

    One-Path Two-Port Calibration A one-path two-port calibration combines full one-port calibration with transmission normalization. This method allows for a more accurate estimation of transmission tracking error (Et) than using transmission normalization. One-path two-port calibration involves connection of the three standards to the source port of the Analyzer (as for one-port calibration) and a THRU standard connection between the calibrated source port and the other receiver port (See figure below).
  • Page 296 One-path two-port calibration Before starting calibration perform, select an active channel, set the parameters of the channel (frequency range, IF bandwidth, etc), and select the calibration kit. To open one-path two-port calibration submenu, use the following softkeys: Calibration > Calibrate > One Path 2-Port Cal Select the direction of the calibration using the Select Ports softkey.
  • Page 297 SENS:CORR:COLL:METH:ERES Selects the ports and sets the one path two-port calibration type calculation of the calibration coefficients on completion of the calibration executed SENS:CORR:COLL:SAVE command. Connect SHORT, OPEN and LOAD standards to the source port in any consequence, as shown in the above figure. Perform measurements clicking softkey...
  • Page 298 The instrument status bar will indicate Calibration in progress... when the measurement is in progress. On completion of the measurement, a check mark will appear in the left part of the softkey. SENS:CORR:COLL:ISOL Measures the isolation calibration data between the receiver port <rcvport> and the source port <srcport>.
  • Page 299 NOTE The calibration status can be checked in channel status bar (See General error correction status table) or in trace status field (See Trace error correction status table). Page 299...

  • Page 300: Full Two-Port Calibration

    Full Two-Port Calibration A full two-port calibration (SOLT) involves seven connections of standards. This calibration combines two one-port calibrations for each test port with measurement of a THRU standard in both directions (See figure below). An optional isolation calibration can be performed by measurement of two LOAD standards connected to both test ports of the Analyzer.
  • Page 301 Before starting calibration perform, select an active channel, set the parameters of the channel (frequency range, IF bandwidth, etc), and select the calibration kit. To open full two-port calibration submenu, use the following softkeys: Calibration > Calibrate > 2-Port SOLT Cal SENS:CORR:COLL:METH:SOLT2 Selects the ports and sets the full two–...
  • Page 302 Connect a THRU standard between the test ports. If the port connectors allow through connection connect them directly (zero electrical length thru). Perform measurement using the Port 1–2 Thru softkeys. The instrument status bar will indicate Calibration in progress... when the measurement is in progress. On completion of the measurement, a check mark will appear in the left part of the softkey.
  • Page 303 SENS:CORR:COLL:CLE Clears the measurement data of the calibration standards. NOTE The calibration status can be checked in channel status bar (See General error correction status table) or in trace status field (See Trace error correction status table). Page 303...

  • Page 304: Sliding Load Calibration

    Sliding Load Calibration In SOLT calibrations, it is possible to employ a Sliding Load calibration standard instead of a fixed one. The use of the SLIDING LOAD standard allows for significant increase in calibration accuracy at high frequencies compared to the FIXED LOAD standard.
  • Page 305 NOTE The Sliding Load calibration is not suitable for low frequencies. To eliminate this limitation, use a FIXED LOAD standard in the lower part of the frequency range. For combined calibration with SLIDING and FIXED LOADS, use the procedure of standard subclasses assigning (See Sliding Load Calibration Example Using Subclasses).

  • Page 306: Non-Insertable Device Measuring

    Non-Insertable Device Measuring The two-port SOLT calibration procedure includes direct connection of test port cables with each other. Such connection is called Zero length THRU or Flush THRU and means that THRU has zero electrical length. However, it is not always possible to connect test port cables directly to each other.
  • Page 307 In practice, there are often more complex cases of non-insertable device measurements — devices having ports of different types and/or having different characteristic impedances, for example, N50 – 3.5, N50 – N75, N50 – Waveguide (See figures below). Non-insertable Device (connectors of different types) The following calibration methods are used for a non-insertable device: ·...
  • Page 308 The only parameter of UNKNOWN THRU, which should be known in advance is approximate electrical delay. In most cases, there is no need to enter its value manually, since the Analyzer has the function of automatic detection of the UNKNOWN THRU electrical delay. For a detailed description, see Unknown Thru Requirements.
  • Page 309 · The Adapter Removal/Insertion method is less accurate than Unknown Thru methods as it requires more standard connections (10 connections compared to 7 connections in SOLR). · Defined Thru is usually more accurate than Adapter Removal, but not as accurate as Unknown Thru method. Page 309...

  • Page 310: Unknown Thru Requirements

    Unknown Thru Requirements An arbitrary two-port device with unknown parameters can be used as an UNKNOWN THRU in 2-port SOLR (Short-Open-Load-Reciprocal) calibration. An UNKNOWN THRU should satisfy next requirements: · The UNKNOWN THRU must be Reciprocal (S21 = S12), which holds for most passive linear network.
  • Page 311 Manual set of Unknown Thru delay It is possible to manually enter either the delay or physical length of the UNKNOWN THRU. The accuracy of the UNKNOWN THRU length must be known within of 1/2 of the wavelength in the Thru media at the maximum calibration frequency. Accordingly, the accuracy of the UNKNOWN THRU delay must be known within of where —...

  • Page 312: Unknown Thru Calibration

    Unknown Thru Calibration Unknown Thru Calibration or SOLR (Short-Open-Load-Reciprocal) is analogous to SOLT calibration, where UNKNOWN THRU is used instead of DEFINED THRU (See figures below). For this purpose, the software includes an UNKNOWN THRU standard in the description of each predefined calibration kit. This method is used when connecting DUT with connectors of the same type, and of the same gender, when one calibration kit can be used to calibrate both ports.
  • Page 313 NOTE If different types of connectors are used to connect the DUT, then a single calibration kit cannot be used for two- port SOLT calibration. In this case, it is necessary to create a description of the user calibration kit, composed of standards suitable for both ports.

  • Page 314: Unknown Thru Addition

    Unknown Thru Addition Unknown Thru Addition method is used to convert the one-port calibrations to the full two-port calibration. Unknown Thru Addition method is used mainly in DUT connecting with connectors of various types. In this case, one predefined calibration kit cannot be used for calibration of both ports, as in the Unknown Thru calibration method.
  • Page 315 Unknown Thru Addition method To add an UNKNOWN THRU, proceed as follows: · First, select in the software the calibration kit used for the port to be calibrated. Perform full one-port calibration for each port. For more details about this procedure, see Full One-port Calibration.
  • Page 316 SENS:CORR:COLL:THRU Sets or reads out the approximate value of the :ADD:LENG mechanical length of an unknown thru in the thru addition function. Select the THRU media: Coax or Waveguide, using Thru Media softkey. SENS:CORR:COLL:THR Specifies the media of the thru in the thru addition U:ADD:MED function.

  • Page 317: Adapter Removal/Insertion

    Adapter Removal/Insertion Adapter Removal and Adapter Insertion functions are designed to mathematically exclude adapter characteristics from the calibration plane or add adapter characteristics to the calibration plane. They adapt two-port SOLT calibration with Zero-Length Thru for non-insertable device measurement. Functions are performed in two steps.
  • Page 318 Second Stage of Adapter removal function Adapter Removal procedure (See Adapter removal figure): · Connect the adapter to the port. · Perform two-port SOLT calibration. · Remove the adapter. · In Adapter Removal/Insertion submenu select port number to which the adapter was connected.
  • Page 319 First Stage of Adapter insertion function Second Stage of Adapter insertion Adapter Insertion procedure (see Adapter insertion figure): · Perform two-port SOLT calibration. · Connect the adapter to the test port, which cannot be directly connected to the DUT. · In Adapter Removal/Insertion submenu select the port number to which the adapter is connected.
  • Page 320 · To complete the Adapter Insert procedure, click Apply. NOTE The Adapter Removal/Insertion function is accessible when the status of the initial two-port calibration is [Cor], not [ ?] or [C!]. NOTE Before starting adapter removal, select the appropriate calibration kit. NOTE When test ports have different Z0, enable automatic Z0 selecting function (See...
  • Page 321 SENS:CORR:COLL:ADAP:MED Specifies the adapter media in the adapter removal/insertion function. Select the desired measurement units for delay (length): seconds or meters using Delay Unit. SENS:CORR:COLL:ADAP:UNIT Selects the display units of the adapter delay (length) adapter removal/insertion function. When the measurement units Meters are selected, enter the permittivity value using Permittivity.
  • Page 322 To clear the measurement results of the standard, click Cancel. This softkey does not cancel the current calibration. To disable the current calibration, turn off the error correction function (See Error Correction Disabling). Page 322...

  • Page 323: Two-Port Trl Calibration

    Two-Port TRL Calibration TRL (Thru-Reflect-Line) calibration is the most accurate calibration method described herein, as it uses airlines as calibration standards. The TRL calibration requires the use of the following calibration standards (See figure below): · THRU or REFERENCE LINE ·...
  • Page 324 LRL calibration, assign TRL-Thru class, which includes THRU and LINEs. A LINE of TRL-Thru class is also called Reference Line. An SHORT is usually used as a second standard in TRL calibration. To denote the second standard of the TRL calibration, assign TRL-Reflect class. A second LINE is used as the third standard in TRL calibration.
  • Page 325 TRL LINE TRL LINE is an airline used in TRL calibration, or the second longest LINE used in LRL calibration. The length of TRL LINE should be known just approximately. The LINE length is used to determine the calibration bandwidth. Let ∆L be the difference between the two LINEs in LRL calibration.
  • Page 326 TRL Calibration Frequency Extension To extend the frequency of TRL calibration a method of dividing into several non- overlapping bands is applied. For each frequency band a separate TRL LINE of different length is used. The phase difference between each TRL LINE and the REFERENCE LINE must be from 20°...
  • Page 327 Connect a TRL LINE/MATCH (LINE between the test ports and 2 LOADs to each port). Perform measurement using the Port 1-2 Line/Match softkey. The instrument status bar will indicate Calibration in progress... when the measurement is in progress. On completion of the measurement, a check mark will appear in the left part of the softkey.
  • Page 328 NOTE The calibration status can be checked in channel status bar (See General error correction status table) or in trace status field (See Trace error correction status table). Page 328...

  • Page 329: Multiline Trl Calibration

    Multiline TRL Calibration Regular TRL calibration, described in the section TRL Calibration uses several LINEs of different lengths for frequency extension. It is provided by the method of dividing the frequency band into separate sub-bands. Multiline TRL calibration also uses several LINEs, but it does not divide the frequency band into several sub-bands.
  • Page 330 Calibration Data in Calibration Kit Manager Standard Multiline TRL REFLECT 1. Type: SHORT or OPEN. 2. Min and max frequency. 3. Model parameters, which allow calculating value of phase response within ±90°. 4. Class: TRL REFLECT. The delay for coaxial airlines is equal to , where L is the length of the LINE, and ν...

  • Page 331: Bandsplit Calibration Using Subclasses

    Bandsplit Calibration Using Subclasses If the required frequency range of the calibration exceeds the operating frequency ranges of some calibration standards, use several standards to have the whole required frequency range covered. A calibration kit should contain several standards of each class (e.g. TRL LINE) with some specified frequency limits. Each of these standards will be applied for the measurements within its frequency limits.

  • Page 332: Trl Calibration Example Using Subclasses

    TRL Calibration Example Using Subclasses Here is an example of calibration using the calibration kit for TRL calibration, in which the "TRL LINE/MATCH" class contains 3 subclasses: load (Lowband), line 2 (TRL Line2), and line 3 (TRL Line3). In the main menu of TRL calibration the 1-2 Line/Match softkey will open the subclass menu (if the above mentioned condition is met).

  • Page 333: Sliding Load Calibration Example Using Subclasses

    Sliding Load Calibration Example Using Subclasses Here is an example of calibration using the calibration kit 85054B, in which the "Load" class contains 3 subclasses: fixed low-frequency load (Lowband), sliding load (Sliding), and fixed broadband load (Broadband). Only first two standards are used for calibration.

  • Page 334: Waveguide Calibration

    Waveguide Calibration The Analyzer supports the following calibration methods in a waveguide environment: · Reflection Normalization Transmission Normalization · Full One-Port Calibration · One-Path Two-Port Calibration · Full Two-Port Calibration · Two-Port TRL Calibration The Analyzer further supports use of a sliding load standard in the above-mentioned calibrations, except TRL.

  • Page 335: Power Calibration

    Power Calibration The Analyzer ensures steady power level at the test port with the specified accuracy. The power level is defined between the instrument’s minimum and maximum output power level. A DUT is connected to the Analyzer by cables (see figure below), which have some losses.
  • Page 336 NOTE If an adapter or other accessory is used when connecting the power meter to the measurement port, the losses introduced by the adapter or accessory are compensated by the Loss Compensation function. The power calibration is performed for each port and each channel individually. NOTE The power correction status is indicated in the trace status field (See...
  • Page 337 Calibration > Power Calibration > Loss Compen > Add A new row will appear under the highlighted one. To delete a highlighted row, use the following softkeys: Calibration > Power Calibration > Loss Compen > Delete To clear all the table, use the following softkeys: Calibration >...
  • Page 338 SOUR:POW:PORT:CORR: Turns the state of the loss compensation used COLL:TABL:LOSS when the power calibration is executed by the SOUR:POW:PORT:CORR:COLL command ON/OFF. Power Calibration Procedure Perform connection and setting of an external power meter as described in Power Meter Setting. Connect the sensor to one of the test ports of the Analyzer and perform calibration as described below.
  • Page 339 NOTE After the power calibration is complete, power correction automatically turns on. Power Correction Setting To enable/disable power correction, use the following softkeys: Calibration > Power Calibration > Correction SOUR:POW:PORT:CORR Turns the power correction ON/OFF. Page 339...

  • Page 340: Receiver Calibration

    Receiver Calibration Receiver calibration is only used for absolute measurements. The receiver calibration is divided into the test receiver (A, B) calibration and the reference receiver (R1, R2) calibration (See Analyzer Block Diagram). The calibration procedure is different for these receivers. 1.
  • Page 341 Receiver Calibration In practice, the power is measured at test port inputs made by the fixture producing losses. The test receiver calibration allows to measure the power at port inputs with higher accuracy. The receiver calibration is performed by sending the calibration signal from the source port to the calibrated port input.
  • Page 342 3. Power offset It is possible to specify the power offset value before calibration. As a result, the receiver readings will be offset by this value. 4. General comments After the receiver calibration is complete, receiver correction automatically turns on. Later it is possible to disable or enable again the receiver correction function.
  • Page 343 To execute the reference receiver calibration, use the following softkeys: Calibration > Receiver Calibration > Calibrate Reference Receiver Use the Calibrate Both softkey to perform the calibration of the test and reference port receivers in succession. Note: Don't use this button if the test receiver and reference receiver require a different source port number.
  • Page 344 Receiver Correction Setting To enable/disable receiver correction, use the following softkeys: Calibration > Receiver Calibration > Correction SENS:CORR:REC Executes receiver calibration of both the test receiver and the reference receiver of the specified port <Pt>. Page 344...

  • Page 345: Scalar Mixer Calibration

    Scalar Mixer Calibration Scalar mixer calibration is the most accurate method of calibration applied to measurements of mixers in frequency offset mode. The scalar mixer calibration requires OPEN, SHORT, and LOAD standards as well as external power meter (See figure below). The power meter connection and setup are described in Power Meter Setting.
  • Page 346 The scalar mixer calibration allows the following measurements: · Reflection S11 and S22 parameters in vector form. · Transmission S21 and S12 parameters in scalar form. The power meter can be connected either one port or both ports. If the power meter was connected to port 1, then S21 transmission parameter will be calibrated.
  • Page 347 Scalar mixer calibration procedure To access the scalar mixer calibration menu, use the following softkeys: Calibration > Mixer/Converter Calibration > Scalar Mixer Calibration SENS:CORR:OFFS:COLL:METH:SMIX2 Selects the ports and sets the scalar mixer calibration type. Then select the required calibration direction: ·...
  • Page 348 the frequency offset feature is on for scalar mixer calibration. SENS:CORR:OFFS:COLL:LOAD Measures the calibration data of the load standard of the specified port when the frequency offset feature is on for scalar mixer calibration. Connect a THRU standard between the test ports. Click the Port 1-2 Thru softkey if a flush thru or non-zero thru is used and is strictly defined in the calibration kit definition.
  • Page 349 SENS:CORR:OFFS:COLL:PMETer Measures the scalar-mixer calibration data using the power meter when the frequency offset feature is ON. To complete the calibration procedure, click Apply softkey. This will activate the process of calibration coefficient table calculation and saving it into the memory. The error correction function will also be automatically enabled.

  • Page 350: Vector Mixer Calibration

    Vector Mixer Calibration Vector mixer calibration is a calibration method applied for mixer measurements. This method allows measurement of both reflection and transmission S-parameters in vector form, including phase and group delay of the transmission coefficient. The vector mixer measurements require an additional mixer with an IF filter, which is called a calibration mixer.
  • Page 351 Vector mixer measurements The de-embedding function requires an S-parameter file of the circuit. Acquisition of such a file for the calibration mixer/filter pair is called vector mixer calibration. To obtain an S-parameter file of the calibration mixer/filter, use SHORT, OPEN, and LOAD calibration standards (See figure below).
  • Page 352 Vector Mixer Calibration Procedure Before starting the calibration, perform the following settings: · Activate a channel and set its parameters (frequency span, IF bandwidth, etc.), and define the calibration kit. · Perform two-port calibration (See Full Two-Port Calibration). · Assemble vector calibration setup. ·...
  • Page 353 Connect SHORT, OPEN and LOAD standards to IF filter output as shown in Vector Mixer Calibration. Perform the measurement using the respective standard softkey. The instrument status bar will indicate Calibration in progress... when the measurement is in progress. Upon completion of the measurement, a check mark will appear in the left part of the softkey.
  • Page 354 NOTE The calibration status can be checked in the channel status bar (See General error correction status table) — F2 and Dmb labels (two-port calibration and de-embedding function). Page 354...

  • Page 355: Automatic Calibration Module

    Automatic Calibration Module Automatic calibration modules (ACMs) are special devices, which allow for automating the process of calibration. The ACM model is selected according to the parameters of the calibrated Analyzer: the working frequency range, the number of measuring ports, and the type of RF connectors. One of the models is shown in the image below.

  • Page 356: Automatic Calibration Module Features

    Automatic Calibration Module Features Calibration Types The ACM allows the Analyzer software to perform one-path two-port, full one-port or full two-port calibration. Calibration is performed with the click of a button. Characterization Characterization is a table of S-parameters for all the states of the ACM switches, stored in the ACM memory.
  • Page 357 To compensate for the thermal error, the ACM features thermal compensation function. Thermal compensation is a software function of the ACM S-parameter correction based on its temperature dependence and the data from the temperature sensor inside the ACM. The temperature dependence of each ACM is determined at the factory and saved into its memory.

  • Page 358: Automatic Calibration Procedure

    Automatic Calibration Procedure Settings Before Calibrating Before calibrating the Analyzer with the ACM, perform some settings, i.e. activate a channel and set channel parameters (frequency range, IF bandwidth, etc.). Connect the ACM to the Analyzer test ports and connect the USB port of the ACM to the USB port of the PC.
  • Page 359 When selecting manual or automatic orientation for ACM, it is recommended to select the automatic orientation. To enable auto orientation for ACM before performing each automatic calibration, use the following softkeys: Orientation > Auto-Orientation [ON | OFF] To manually select the orientation, turn OFF Auto- Orientation.
  • Page 360 Enable or disable the thermal compensation using the Thermo compensation [ON | OFF] softkey. To display detailed information on characterization, use the Characterization Info softkey. SENS:CORR:COLL:ECAL:INF? Gets information on the AutoCal Module connected to the Network Analyzer. Page 360...

  • Page 361: One/Two-Port Calibration

    One/Two-Port Calibration For a one/two-port calibration, connect any ports of the ACM to the ports to be calibrated on the Analyzer. To open automatic calibration submenu, use the following softkeys: Calibration > AutoCal To perform full one-port calibration, use the 1-Port AutoCal softkey.
  • Page 362 To perform full two-port calibration, click the 2-Port AutoCal softkey. Wait until calibration is complete. The instrument status bar will indicate Calibration in progress... when the measurement is in progress. SENS:CORR:COLL:ECAL:SOLT2 Executes full two-port calibration between the specified two ports of the specified channel using the AutoCal module.

  • Page 363: User Characterization Procedure

    User Characterization Procedure User characterization of ACM is required when modifying ACM connectors with adapters. The characterization is performed for the new ACM configuration, which includes adapters. To ensure calibration accuracy, it is not recommended to disconnect and reconnect the adapters back after characterization until calibration is complete.
  • Page 364 Fill in the following fields: · User name · Analyzer name · Characterization location · Connectors (types of adapter connectors) · Adapter description (description of adapters) Use the Save softkey to complete the user characterization of the ACM. Page 364...

  • Page 365: Confidence Check Procedure

    Confidence Check Procedure Perform a confidence check if the reliability of the current calibration needs to be verified. This function can be used to check the accuracy of either calibration performed with an ACM or with a mechanical calibration kit. Connect the ACM to the Analyzer test ports and connect the USB port of the ACM to the USB port of the PC.

  • Page 366: Erasing The User Characterization

    Erasing the User Characterization If necessary, it is possible to erase the user characterization in the ACM. The procedure erases all data of selected user characterization, overwriting it with zeros. Factory characterization cannot be erased. Select the user characterization using the Characterization softkey.

  • Page 367: Manual Switch Control

    Manual Switch Control The software allows to manage the ACM switches directly. The ACM states are selected from the list of possible states and switched by pressing the button. The number of switches and states of each ACM are described in the block diagrams of modules.

  • Page 368: Error Correction Status

    Error Correction Status The error correction status is indicated for each trace individually. There is also a general status of error correction for all traces of a channel. General error correction status The general error correction status for all S-parameter traces of a channel is indicated in the specific field on a channel status bar (See General error correction status...
  • Page 369 Trace error correction status The error correction status for each individual trace is indicated in the trace status field (See table below). For trace status field description, see Trace Status Field. Symbols Definition OPEN response calibration SHORT response calibration THRU response calibration One-path two-port calibration Full one-port (SOL) calibration Full two-port (SOLT) or TRL calibration...

  • Page 370: Error Correction Disabling

    Error Correction Disabling This feature allows to disable the error correction function, which automatically becomes enabled after completion of calibration by any method. To disable and enable the error correction function, use the following softkeys: Calibration > Correction SENS:CORR:STAT Turns the S-parameter error correction ON/OFF. Page 370...

  • Page 371: System Impedance Z0

    System Impedance Z0 Z0 is the system impedance of a measurement path. Normally, it is equal to the impedance of the calibration standards used for calibration. The Z0 value should be specified before calibration, as it is used for calibration coefficient calculations. For waveguide calibration, the system impedance must be set to 1 Ω.
  • Page 372 Automatic Z0 Selecting The automatic system impedance selecting function sets Z0 during the process of calibration standard measurement, using data from the definition of the calibration standard in a calibration kit. Z0 of the corresponding port is set when measuring one- port standards.

  • Page 373: Calibration Trigger Source

    Calibration Trigger Source The function sets the trigger source to start measuring the calibration standards. If an Internal source is selected, the calibration starts immediately. If the source is System, the system trigger is used to start the calibration. The source of the system trigger is set by the softkey: Stimulus >...

  • Page 374: Measurement Data Analysis

    Measurement Data Analysis The following section describes the process of Measurement Data Analysis using the Analyzer. Special software marker tools are used to read and look up the numerical values of the stimulus and the measured value on selected points on the graph. For a detailed description, see Markers.

  • Page 375: Markers

    Markers A marker is a tool for numerical readout of a stimulus value and value of the measured parameter in a specific point on the trace. Up to 16 markers can be activated on each trace. A trace with two markers is shown in the figure below. Trace with two markers The markers allow to perform the following tasks: ·...
  • Page 376 The marker data field contents vary depending on the display format (rectangular or circular): · In rectangular format, the marker shows the measurement parameter value plotted along Y-axis in the active format (See the table below). Format Type Label Data Type (Y-axis) Measurement Description Unit (Y-axis)
  • Page 377 · In circular format, the marker shows two or three values listed in the table below. Label Marker Readings (Measurement Unit) Reading 1 Reading 2 Reading 3 Smith (Lin) Linear magnitude Phase (°) — Smith (Log) Logarithmic Phase (°) — magnitude (dB) Smith (Re/Im) Real part...
  • Page 378 Marker Addition To enable a new marker, use the following softkeys: Markers > Add Marker CALC:MARK Turns the marker ON/OFF. NOTE The new marker appears as the active marker in the middle of the stimulus axis. The input field for the marker stimulus value is activated.
  • Page 379 Marker Activation To activate a marker by its number, use the following softkeys: Markers > Select > Marker n To activate a marker from the list of markers, use the following softkeys: Markers > Select Next CALC:MARK:ACT Sets the active marker. NOTE A marker can be activated by clicking on it.
  • Page 380 Marker Stimulus Value Setting The active marker must be selected before setting the marker stimulus value. The stimulus value must be set by entering the numerical value from the keyboard, by arrows, by dragging the marker using the mouse (See Marker Stimulus Value Setting), or by enabling the search function (See Marker Position Search...

  • Page 381: Reference Marker Feature

    Reference Marker Feature The reference marker feature allows to view the data relative to the reference marker. Other markers readings are represented as delta relative to the reference marker. The reference marker shows the absolute data and is indicated with «R» symbol instead of a number (See figure below).
  • Page 382 To enable/disable the reference marker, use the following softkeys: Markers > Reference Marker CALC:MARK Turns the marker ON/OFF. CALC:MARK:ACT Sets the active marker. CALC:MARK:REF Turns the reference marker ON/OFF. Page 382...

  • Page 383: Marker Properties

    Marker Properties The following section describes marker properties: · Marker Coupling Feature is the function that determines the coupling of markers with the same numbers on different traces. · Marker Table is used to display the marker values of all traces and channels. ·...

  • Page 384: Marker Coupling Feature

    Marker Coupling Feature The marker coupling feature enables/disables coupling of markers with the same numbers on different traces. If the feature is turned on, the markers with the same numbers will move along the X-axis synchronously on all the traces. If the coupling feature is off, the position of the markers with same numbers along X-axis will be independent (See figure below).

  • Page 385: Marker Table

    Marker Table The marker table allows to view the values of the markers of all traces and channels (See figure below). Marker table To show/hide the marker table, use the following softkeys: Markers > Properties > Marker Table DISP:MARKer:TABL Turns the marker table ON/OFF. DISP:PART:VIS Shows or hides the display partition specified by the <char>...

  • Page 386: Marker Value Indication Capacity

    Marker Value Indication Capacity By default, the marker stimulus values are displayed with 8 decimal points and marker response values are displayed with 5 decimal points. These settings can be changed. To set the marker value indication capacity, use the following softkeys: Markers >...

  • Page 387: Multi Marker Data Display

    Multi Marker Data Display If several overlapping traces are displayed in one diagram, by default only active marker data is displayed on the screen. The display of the marker data for all traces can be enabled simultaneously. The markers for different traces can be distinguished by color.

  • Page 388: Marker Data Arrangement

    Marker Data Arrangement By default, marker data is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen. The marker data display can be rearranged on the screen. The marker data position on the screen is shown using two parameters – relative position on the X and Y axes, in percent.
  • Page 389 NOTE The marker data can also be drag-and-dropped using the mouse. Page 389...

  • Page 390: Marker Data Alignment

    Marker Data Alignment By default, marker data is displayed independently for each trace. The marker data display can be aligned on the screen. This alignment deactivates the independent marker data layout. In this case, the relative position on the X and Y axes is valid only for the first trace.

  • Page 391: Memory Trace Value Display

    Memory Trace Value Display By default, the marker values of the data traces (not memory traces) are displayed on the screen. The display of memory trace maker values can be enabled, if a memory trace is available. To enable/disable the display of memory trace marker values, toggle the softkey: Marker >...

  • Page 392: Marker Discrete Mode

    Marker Discrete Mode By default, the marker can be moved along the values interpolated between measurement points. To move the marker only between actual measurement points, enable the marker discrete mode. Marker Discrete and Continuous Modes To enable / disable discrete mode, use the following softkeys: Marker >...

  • Page 393: Marker Position Search Functions

    Marker Position Search Functions The marker position search function allows to find the following values on a trace: · Maximum value · Minimum value · Peak value · Target level This section contains information about search tracking mode (See Search Tracking) and on the function used to set the search range of the marker position (See Search...

  • Page 394: Maximum And Minimum Search Functions

    Maximum and Minimum Search Functions Maximum and minimum search functions are used to determine the maximum and minimum values of the measured parameter and move the marker to these positions on the trace (See figure below). Maximum and minimum search To find the maximum or minimum values on a trace, use the following softkeys: Markers >...
  • Page 395 NOTE Activate the marker before starting maximum or minimum search (See Marker Activation). In Smith chart and polar formats, the search is executed for the first marker value. Page 395...

  • Page 396: Search For Peak

    Search for Peak Peak search function is used to determine the peak value of the measured parameter and move the marker to this position on the trace. Peak is a local extreme of the trace. Peak is considered positive if the value of the peak is greater than the values of the adjacent points (See figure below).
  • Page 397 · The peaks must have the polarity (positive, negative, or both) specified by the user. · The peaks must have a peak deviation no less than the value assigned by the user. The following options for the peak search are available: ·...
  • Page 398 Then enter the value using the numerical keypad, or the « », arrows. CALC:MARK:FUNC:PEXC Sets or reads out the peak excursion value when the marker peak search is performed CALC:MARK:FUNC:EXEC command. To activate the nearest peak search, use the following softkeys: Markers >...

  • Page 399: Search For Target Level

    Search for Target Level The target level search function is used to locate the marker with the given level of the measured parameter (See figure below). The trace can have two types of transition at the points where the target level crosses the trace: ·...
  • Page 400 CALC:MARK:FUNC:TTR Selects the type of the target transition when the marker transition search is performed by CALC:MARK:FUNC:EXEC command. To enter the target level value, use the following softkeys: Markers > Marker Search > Target > Target Value Then enter the value using the numerical keypad, or the « », arrows.
  • Page 401 To enable/disable target level indication on the screen, use the following softkeys: Markers > Marker Search > Target > Target Line The Clear All Target Lines softkey disables indication of target level lines of all the markers. NOTE Activate the marker before starting maximum or minimum search (see Marker Activation).

  • Page 402: Search Tracking

    Search Tracking The marker position search function, by default, can be initiated by any press of the search key. Search tracking mode performs continuous marker position search, until this mode is disabled. To enable/disable search tracking mode, use the following softkeys: Markers >...

  • Page 403: Search Range

    Search Range The search range for the marker position search can be set by setting the stimulus limits. This function includes the following additional features: · Search range coupling, which allows to define the same search range for all the traces of a channel. ·...
  • Page 404 CALC:MARK:FUNC:DOM:COUP Turns the state of the marker search range coupling for different traces ON/OFF. To enable/disable search range limits indication, use the following softkeys: Markers > Marker Search > Search Range Lines Page 404...

  • Page 405: Marker Math Functions

    Marker Math Functions Marker math functions use markers to calculate various trace characteristics. Four marker math functions are available: · Statistics · Bandwidth Search · Flatness · RF Filter Page 405...

  • Page 406: Trace Statistics

    Trace Statistics The trace statistics feature allows to determine and view trace parameters, such as mean, standard deviation, and peak-to-peak. The range of trace statistics can be defined by two markers (See figure below). Trace statistics Trace Statistics parameter Symbol Definition Formula mean...
  • Page 407 Turns the math statistics display ON/OFF. CALC:MST To enable/disable trace statistics range, use the following softkeys: Markers > Marker Math > Statistics > Statistic Range Selects either the partial frequency range or the entire CALC:MST:DOM frequency range to be used for math statistic calculation. To set the start/stop markers of the statistics range, use the following softkeys: Markers >...

  • Page 408: Bandwidth Search

    Bandwidth Search The bandwidth search function allows to determine and view the following parameters of a passband or a stopband: bandwidth, center frequency, lower frequency, higher frequency, Q value, and insertion loss (See figure below). The bandwidth search is executed from the reference point. The active marker or the maximum trace value can be selected as the reference.
  • Page 409 Bandwidth parameters Parameter Symbol Definition Formula Description Bandwidth The difference between the higher and F2 – F1 lower cutoff frequencies. cent Center The midpoint between the higher and (F1+F2)/ Frequency lower cutoff frequencies. Lower Cutoff The lower frequency point of the Frequency intersection of the bandwidth cutoff level and the trace.
  • Page 410 CALC:MARK:BWID:TYPE Sets the type of the bandwidth search function. To set the search reference point, use the following softkeys: Markers > Marker Math > Bandwidth Search > Search Ref > > [Marker | Maximum | Minimum] CALC:MARK:BWID:REF Selects the reference point for the bandwidth search function: reference marker or absolute maximum value of the trace.

  • Page 411: Flatness

    Flatness The flatness search function allows to determine and view the following trace parameters: gain, slope, and flatness. Two markers to specify the flatness search range should be set (See figure below). Flatness search Page 411...
  • Page 412 Flatness parameters Parameter Symbol Definition Description gain Gain Marker 1 value. slope Slope Difference between marker 2 and marker 1 values. flat Flatness Sum of “positive” and “negative” peaks of the trace, which are measured from the line connecting marker 1 and marker 2 (See above figure). To enable/disable the flatness search function, use the following softkeys: Markers >...

  • Page 413: Rf Filter Statistics

    RF Filter Statistics The RF filter statistics function allows to determine and view the following filter parameters: loss, peak-to-peak in a passband, and rejection in a stopband. The passband is specified by the first pair of markers, and the stopband is specified by the second pair of markers (See figure below).
  • Page 414 To select the markers specifying the passband, use the following softkeys: Markers > Marker Math > RF Filter Stats > Passband Start Markers > Marker Math > RF Filter Stats > Passband Stop To select the markers specifying the stopband, use the following softkeys: Markers >...

  • Page 415: Marker Functions

    Marker Functions Using the current position of a marker, the following parameter settings can be set: · stimulus start · stimulus stop · stimulus center · reference level · electrical delay Activate the marker before adjusting these settings (See Marker Activation).
  • Page 416 To set reference marker to the active marker point, use the following softkeys: Markers > Marker Functions > Marker–>Ref Marker Page 416...

  • Page 417: Memory Trace Function

    Memory Trace Function An associated memory trace can be created for each data trace. The memory trace is saved at the moment when the corresponding softkey is pressed or a program command is received. After saving the memory trace, the screen displays two traces —...
  • Page 418 Saving Data Trace into Memory The function of saving data traces into memory is applied to an individual trace or to all traces of the channel at once. The trace to which the function is applied must be preselected as active (See Selection of Active Trace/Channel).
  • Page 419 Display > Trace Display > [ Data | Memory | Data & Memory | OFF ] DISP:WIND:TRAC:MEM Turns the memory trace display ON/OFF. DISP:WIND:TRAC:STAT Turns the data trace display ON/OFF. Page 419...

  • Page 420: Memory Fifo

    Memory FIFO The memory FIFO function increases the number of memory traces up to 8 for each data trace. Memory traces are saved in a FIFO (first-in-first-out) queue. By default, the memory FIFO function is disabled, the queue depth is 1, so there is only 1 memory trace associated with each data trace.
  • Page 421 To assign a memory trace as active for math operations, use the following softkeys: Display > Memory > Active Memory > [ 1 | 2 | 3 ... 8 ] The memory traces in the FIFO are arranged in chronological order, where 1 is the newest save, 8 is the oldest.
  • Page 422 Erasing FIFO Memory To erase the memory trace in FIFO, use the following softkeys: Display > Memory > Erase Memory > [ 1 | 2 | 3 ...8 | All ] Page 422...

  • Page 423: Mathematical Operations

    Mathematical Operations The memory trace can be used for mathematical operations with the data trace. The mathematical operations are performed on complex values before they are formatted for display. The result of math operation replaces the data trace. The following mathematical operations can be performed: Divides the measured data by the memory data.
  • Page 424 To access math operations, use the following softkeys: Display > Memory > Data Math > [ Data / Mem | Data * Mem | Data – Mem | Data + Mem | OFF ] CALC:MATH:FUNC Selects the math operation between the measured data and the memory data.

  • Page 425: Trace Hold

    Trace Hold The trace hold function is used to hold the maximum or minimum values of the trace. When the function is enabled, the inscription [Max hold] or [Min hold] appears in the trace status bar (See Trace Status Field). To turn ON/OFF trace hold function press the following softkeys: Display >...

  • Page 426: Fixture Simulation

    Fixture Simulation The fixture simulation functions are a set of software functions for mathematically simulating measurement conditions that are different from the actual measurement conditions. The following conditions can be simulated: · Port Extension Automatic Port Extension · Port reference impedance conversion ·...
  • Page 427 The logic diagram of the fixture simulation function is shown in the figure below. Logic diagram of fixture simulation function Page 427...
  • Page 428 The data processing flow diagram of the fixture simulation feature is shown in the figure below. Data processing flow diagram of fixture simulation function Page 428...
  • Page 429 The channel to which the function is applied must be preselected as active (See Selection of Active Trace/Channel). Fixture simulation functions affect all the traces of the channel. To enable fixture simulation functions, use the following softkeys: Analysis > Fixture Simulator [ ON | OFF ] CALC:FSIM:STAT Turns the fixture simulation function ON/OFF.

  • Page 430: Port Extension

    Port Extension The port extension function moves the calibration plane toward the DUT terminals by the specified electrical delay value. The function is useful when a fixture is used for the DUT connecting and the calibration cannot be performed at the DUT terminals. The calibration plane can be established at coaxial connectors of the fixture and then moved to the DUT terminals using the port extension function (See figure below).
  • Page 431 3. Loss determined by the losses in three frequency points ( at DC, frequency at frequency ) NOTE The accuracy of the port extension method depends on the fixture used. The closer the fixture parameters are to the model of a perfectly matched transmission line, the higher the accuracy.
  • Page 432 Loss1 Freq1 Perform the same steps for Enter the value, use the following softkey: Loss at DC SENS:CORR:EXT:PORT:INCL Turns the loss compensation of loss 1 and loss 2 for the port extension function ON/OFF. SENS:CORR:EXT:PORT:FREQ Sets or reads out the values of the frequency 1 and frequency 2 to calculate the loss for the port extension function.

  • Page 433: Automatic Port Extension

    Automatic Port Extension The auto port extension function allows for automatic calculation of port extension parameters by measuring a SHORT or an OPEN standard. It is also possible to measure both standards; in this case the average value will be used. The auto port extension function can be used simultaneously for any number of ports from 1 to the number of actual instrument ports.
  • Page 434 Method [Current Span | Active Marker | User Span] SENS:CORR:EXT:AUTO:PORT Turns the status of the auto port extension for the port number <Pt> ON/OFF. SENS:CORR:EXT:AUTO:CONF Specifies the frequency range used for calculation of the results of the auto port extension function. Enable the include loss function Loss1, Loss2, if required: Include Loss [ON | OFF] Enable adjust mismatch function Loss at DC, if required:...
  • Page 435 If both measurements have been performed, the result will appear as the average value of the two. SENS:CORR:EXT:AUTO:RES Deletes the finished measurement data of the OPEN and SHORT standards of the auto port extension function. SENS:CORR:EXT:AUTO:MEAS Performs measurement of the standard SHORT or OPEN, automatically calculates and sets the parameters of the port extension.

  • Page 436: Port Reference Impedance (Z) Conversion

    Port Reference Impedance (Z) Conversion The default reference impedance of a port is equal to the impedance of the connectors (50 or 75 Ω). But in the process, it is often required to measure DUT with arbitrary resistance (See example in the figure below), not equal to the impedance of a port.
  • Page 437 Port reference impedance conversion Renormalization can be based on two alternative microwave circuit theories, whose conversion formulas may yield different results if the reference impedance of at least one test port has a non-zero imaginary part. The first theory is "A General Waveguide Circuit Theory"...
  • Page 438 To enter the value of the simulated impedance of Port n, use the Port n Z0 Real and Port n Z0 Imag softkeys. CALC:FSIM:SEND:ZCON: Sets or reads out the value of the impedance of the PORT:Z0 port impedance conversion function. CALC:FSIM:SEND:ZCON: Sets or reads out the real part of the impedance of PORT:Z0:REAL...

  • Page 439: De-Embedding

    De-embedding De-embedding is a function of transforming the S-parameter by eliminating some circuit effect from the measurement results. The de-embedding function allows to mathematically exclude the effect of the fixture circuit existing between the calibration plane and the DUT in the real network from the measurement results.
  • Page 440 NOTE The S-matrices of all de-embedding circuits are oriented so that the S11 is directed to the Analyzer port and S22 directed to the DUT. To enable/disable the de-embedding function, use the following softkeys: Analysis > Fixture Simulator > De-Embedding > De- Embedding [ON | OFF] If the S-parameters file is not specified, the softkey for Port n activation will be grayed out.

  • Page 441: Embedding

    Embedding Embedding is a function of the S-parameter transformation via integration of some virtual circuit into the real network (See figure below). The embedding function allows to mathematically simulate the DUT parameters after adding the fixture circuits. The embedding function is an inverted de-embedding function.
  • Page 442 To enable/disable the embedding function, use the following softkeys: Analysis > Fixture Simulator > Embedding > Embedding [ON | OFF] If the S-parameters file is not specified, the softkey for Port n activation will be grayed out. To enter the file name of the embedded circuit S-parameters of Port n, use the following softkeys: Analysis >...

  • Page 443: Time Domain Transformation

    Time Domain Transformation The Analyzer measures parameters of the DUT in the frequency domain. Time domain transformation is a function of mathematical transformation of the measured parameters in order to obtain the time domain representation. Time domain function simulates time-domain reflectometry. The meaning of which is to influence the DUT with a pulsed or step signal, followed by the analysis of the reflected signal.
  • Page 444 used when the DUT response at DC is well known, for example, for a low loss cable the DC value is: · "1" for open-ended cable. · "-1" for a short-circuited cable. · "0" for a cable terminated with a matched load. Transformation Unambiguity Range The time domain response is a periodic function due to the discrete nature of the frequency response.
  • Page 445 Pre-programmed window types Window Lowpass Impulse Lowpass Step Side Pulse Side Edge Width Lobes Width Lobes Level Level Minimum – 13 dB – 21 dB Normal – 44 dB – 60 dB Maximum – 75 dB – 70 dB X-axis Representation The X-axis units can be set in seconds or distance units (meters or feet).
  • Page 446 Time Domain Transformation Activation To enable/disable time domain transformation function, use the following softkeys: Analysis > Time Domain > Time Domain [ON | OFF] CALC:TRAN:TIME:STAT Turns the time domain transformation function ON/OFF. NOTE Time domain transformation function is accessible only in linear frequency sweep mode.
  • Page 447 To set the center and span of the time domain, use the following softkeys: Analysis > Time Domain > Center Analysis > Time Domain > Span CALC:TRAN:TIME:CENT Sets or reads out the time domain center value when the time domain transformation function is turned ON.
  • Page 448 Selects the transformation type for the time domain CALC:TRAN:TIME transformation function: band-pass or low-pass. Selects the stimulus type for the time domain CALC:TRAN:TIME:STIM transformation function: impulse or step. Time Domain Transformation Window Shape Setting To set the window shape, use the following softkeys: Analysis >...
  • Page 449 · "6" corresponds to normal window. · "13" corresponds to maximum widow. CALC:TRAN:TIME:KBES Sets or reads out the β parameter, which controls the Kaiser-Bessel window shape when performing the time domain transformation. NOTE The impulse width and β of the Kaiser-Bessel filter are the dependent parameters.
  • Page 450 To turn on/off the automatic extrapolation of DC value, use the following softkeys: Analysis > Time Domain > Extrapolate DC [ ON | OFF ] CALC:TRAN:TIME:EXTR:DC Turns ON/OFF the DC extrapolation, when the time domain transformation function is turned To set the DC value manually, use the following softkeys: Analysis >...

  • Page 451: Cable Correction Function

    Cable Correction Function Cable correction function allows to consider the influence of cable characteristics during transform in the time domain. The function contains the cable velocity factor and the cable loss in dB/m. The cable loss value is indicated at the specified frequency.
  • Page 452 Cable Table To open the cable table, use the following softkeys: Analysis > Time Domain > Cable Correction > Select Cable To select the cable in table, use the Select softkey. NOTE: Make sure that the selected cable is check marked. To add the new cable in the table, use the Add New Cable softkey: NOTE: A new cable can be added in the table by specifying...
  • Page 453 Velocity Factor Velocity factor is used to calculate distance along a cable from the cable delay value. If the cable correction function is disabled, the software assumes it to be equal to 1. To obtain the accurate mismatch location in a cable, it is important to set the right velocity factor of the cable.
  • Page 454 Frequency To set the frequency, at which the cable loss is specified, use the following softkeys: Analysis > Time Domain > Cable Correction > Frequency SENS:CORR:TRAN:TIME:FREQ Sets or reads out the frequency value at which the cable loss is specified for the cable correction function when the time domain transformation function is turned ON.

  • Page 455: Time Domain Gating

    Time Domain Gating Time domain gating is a function that mathematically removes unwanted responses in the time domain. The function performs a time domain transformation, selects the region in the time domain, deletes the response inside (or outside) the selected region and transforms back to the frequency domain.
  • Page 456 Window Shape Bandpass Gate Resolution (Minimum Gate Span) Sidelobe Level Minimum – 48 dB Normal – 68 dB Wide – 57 dB Maximum – 70 dB DUT Low Pass Settings The Time Domain Gating function has a setting to distinguish between the frequency lowpass DUT and the frequency bandpass DUT.
  • Page 457 · "0" for a cable terminated with a matched load. The Analyzer can set the harmonic frequency grid from the current frequency settings with one click. NOTE The following settings of the Gating function: DUT Low Pass ON/OFF, Set Frequency Low Pass, Extrapolate DC and DC value also set the corresponding settings of the Time Domain function (See Time Domain...
  • Page 458 CALC:FILT:TIME:STOP Sets or reads out the gate stop value of the gating function. To set the center and span of the time domain gate, use the following softkeys: Analysis > Gating > Center Analysis > Gating > Span CALC:FILT:TIME:CENT Sets or reads out the gate center value of the gating function.
  • Page 459 Time Domain Gate Shape Setting To set the time domain gate shape, use the following softkeys: Analysis > Gating > Shape > [ Minimum | Normal | Wide | Maximum ] CALC:FILT:TIME:SHAP Sets or reads out the gate shape of the gating function.
  • Page 460 To enable extrapolation of DC values, use the following softkeys: Analysis > Time Domain > Extrapolate DC [ ON | OFF ] CALC:TRAN:TIME:EXTR:DC Turns ON/OFF the DC extrapolation, when the DUT type is lowpass. To set the DC value manually, use the following softkeys: Analysis >...

  • Page 461: S-Parameter Conversion

    S-Parameter Conversion The S-parameter conversion function allows for the conversion of measurement results ( ) to the following parameters: Parameter Equation Impedance in reflection measurement ( ) Admittance in reflection measurement ( ) Impedance in transmission measurement ( ) Admittance in transmission measurement ( ) Inverse S-parameter Equivalent admittance in transmission shunt measurements (...
  • Page 462 NOTE Equations for are approximate. The general method of converting S-parameters to Z, Y, H, T, ABCD- parameters is presented in the General S-Parameter Conversion. The reason for using the approximate method is the measurement speed, as only one S-parameter is used in the calculations, whereas the general method requires measurement of the full matrix of S-parameters.
  • Page 463 CALC:CONV:FUNC Sets or reads out the S-parameter conversion function type. NOTE All conversion types are indicated in the trace status field, when enabled. Page 463...

  • Page 464: General S-Parameter Conversion

    General S-Parameter Conversion This section describes the most common method of transformation of the S- parameters to Z, Y, T, H, ABCD - parameters. The method is described in: Dean A. Frickey’s "Conversions Between S, Z, Y, h, ABCD, and T Parameters which are Valid for Complex Source and Load Impedances".
  • Page 465 NOTE The [Conv] symbols are indicated in the trace status field, when general conversion is enabled. Page 465...

  • Page 466: Limit Test

    Limit Test The limit test is a function of automatic pass/fail judgment for the trace of the measurement result. The judgment is based on the comparison of the trace to the limit line set by the user. The limit line can consist of one or several segments (See figure below). Each segment checks the measured value for failure, whether it is an upper or lower limit.
  • Page 467 · If the measurement result failed, the result will be indicated in the following ways (See figure below): 1. Tr1:Limit Fail will be displayed in upper right corner of the diagram. 2. Fail sign will be displayed in red in the center of the window. 3.
  • Page 468 CALC:LIM Turns the limit test ON/OFF. Limit Line Editing In the editing mode the limit table will appear in the lower part of the screen (See figure below). The limit table will be hidden when quitting the submenu. Limit line table Navigating within the table to enter the values of the following parameters of a limit test segment: Type...
  • Page 469 To access the limit line editing mode, use the following softkeys: Analysis > Limit Test > Edit Limit Line To add a new row in the table, click Add. The new row will appear below the highlighted one. To delete a row from the table, click Delete. The highlighted row will be deleted.
  • Page 470 Limit test display management To enable/disable display of a limit line, use the following softkeys: Analysis > Limit Test > Limit Line [ ON|OFF ] To enable/disable display of fail sign in the center of the diagram, use Fail Sign softkey. CALC:LIM:DISP Turns the limit line display of the limit test function ON/OFF.
  • Page 471 Analysis > Limit Test > Limit Line Offsets > Marker – > Response Ofs CALC:LIM:OFFS:AMPL Sets and reads out the value of the limit line offset along the Y-axis. CALC:LIM:OFFS:MARK Sets the value of the limit line offset along the Y- axis to the active marker value.

  • Page 472: Ripple Limit Test

    Ripple Limit Test The ripple limit test is an automatic pass/fail check of the measured trace data. The trace is checked against the maximum ripple value (ripple limit). The ripple value is the difference between the maximum and minimum response of the trace in the trace frequency band.
  • Page 473 2. Fail sign will be displayed in red in the center of the window. 3. A beep will be heard. The fail sign and the beep can be disabled using the Fail Sign softkey. For beep deactivation see Beeper Settings. Test fail indication The display of the ripple value can be enabled/disabled in the ripple limit test status line in the upper right corner of the diagram (See figure below).
  • Page 474 Ripple Limit Enabling/Disabling To enable/disable ripple limit test function, use the following softkeys: Analysis > Ripple Limit > Ripple Test [ ON|OFF ] CALC:RLIM Turns the ripple limit test ON/OFF. Ripple Limit Editing In the editing mode, the limit table will appear in the lower part of the screen (See figure below).
  • Page 475 Analysis > Ripple Limit > Edit Ripple Limit To add a new row in the table, click Add. The new row will appear below the highlighted one. To delete a row from the table, click Delete. The highlighted row will be deleted. CALC:RLIM:DATA Sets the data array, which is the limit line for the ripple limit function.
  • Page 476 DISP:FSIG Turns the "fail" sign display ON/OFF when performing limit test or ripple limit test. To enter the number of the band, whose ripple value should be displayed, use the following softkeys: Analysis > Ripple Limit > Ripple Value Band Sets or reads out the number of the ripple limit test CALC:RLIM:DISP:SEL band selected for the ripple value display.

  • Page 477: Peak Limits Test

    Peak Limits Test The peak limits test function checks whether the trace point with the minimum (or maximum) value of the measured value falls within the specified limits of the frequency range and/or value range (see figure below). If the trace point minimum (or maximum) falls within the specified limits, the test is passed (test result "pass").
  • Page 478 Peak Limits Test parameter A description of the parameters of the peak limits test function in the software is shown in the table below. Parameter Definition Selects the type of limit (one of the limits or both at the Limit Type same time).
  • Page 479 The figure below shows an example of the trace minimum point falling within the value range (test result "pass"). Example of the trace minimum value falling within the range of values (Limit type: Response) Page 479...
  • Page 480 The figure below shows an example of the trace minimum point being out of the value range (test result "fail"). Example of the minimum trace point value being outside the value range (Limit type: All) Page 480...
  • Page 481 Peak Limits Enabling/Disabling To enable/disable peak limits test function, use the following softkeys: Analysis > Peak Limits > Peak Limits [ ON|OFF ] Editing Search Parameters for Peak Limits To select the limit type, use the following softkeys: Analysis > Peak Limits > Limit Type Then select the required type: ·...
  • Page 482 · If the measurement result passed the peak limit test, the trace number and the result will be seen: Tr1: PkLim Pass. · If the measurement result failed, the result will be indicated in the following ways (See figure above): 1.

  • Page 483: Special Measurement Modes

    Special Measurement Modes This section describes the measurements that use optional equipment, as well as special function available in select Analyzer models: · Measurement of frequency conversion devices (See Mixer Measurements). Page 483...

  • Page 484: Mixer Measurements

    Mixer Measurements Mixer Measurement Methods The Analyzer allows to perform measurements of mixers and other frequency converting devices using scalar and vector methods. The scalar method allows measurement of the scalar transmission S-parameters of frequency converting devices. Phase and group delay measurements are not accessible in this mode.
  • Page 485 Vector mixer measurement setup The vector mixer calibration method doesn’t use frequency offset. This method ensures the same frequency at both test ports of the Analyzer in normal operation mode. The vector mixer calibration procedure is described in Vector Mixer Calibration.

  • Page 486: Frequency Offset Mode

    Frequency Offset Mode The frequency offset mode allows for S-parameter measurement of frequency converting devices, including vector reflection measurements scalar transmission measurements. In this context, frequency converting devices include both frequency shifting devices such as mixers and converters, as well as devices dividing or multiplying frequency.
  • Page 487 Channel window in frequency offset mode Start and Stop frequency can be set for each port directly instead of using Multiplier, Divider and Offset values. Using Start/Stop values will set Multiplier and Offset, which can be determined from the specified frequency and the base frequency while maintaining the preset Divider.
  • Page 488 To select the offset type, use the following softkeys: Offset Type > Port1/Port2 or Source/Receivers SENS:OFFS:TYPE Sets or reads out the frequency offset type when the frequency offset feature is ON. If conventional frequency offset mode uses and Offset Type is set to Port1/Port2, enter offset coefficients for Ports.
  • Page 489 To enter offset coefficients of divider, use the Divider softkey. SENS:OFFS:PORT:DIV Sets or reads out the basic frequency range Divider of Port n when offset type is Port1/Port2. Sets or reads out the basic frequency range SENS:OFFS:SOUR:DIV Divider to get the Source frequency when offset type is Source/Receivers.
  • Page 490 To set the stop frequency range, use the Stop softkey. Sets or reads out the frequency sweep Stop of SENS:OFFS:PORT:STOP port <Pt> when offset type is Port1/Port2. Sets or reads out the frequency sweep Stop of SENS:OFFS:SOUR:STOP Source when offset type Source/Receivers.

  • Page 491: Automatic Adjustment Of Offset Frequency

    Automatic Adjustment of Offset Frequency When performing mixer measurements in frequency offset mode, the offset frequency must be set so that it is equal to the LO frequency. A small difference between the frequencies of the Analyzer and the external LO source (frequency error) reduces the measurement accuracy.
  • Page 492 Typical residual error of automatic offset adjustment Typical residual error of automatic offset IF filter bandwidth adjustment 10 kHz 500 Hz 3 kHz 50 Hz 1 kHz 15 Hz 300 Hz 5 Hz 100 Hz 2 Hz Settings of Automatic Offset Adjustment function To enable/disable automatic offset adjustment function, use the following softkeys: Stimulus >...
  • Page 493 Sets or reads out the port number to which SENS:OFFS:ADJ:PORT frequency adjust is applied when the frequency offset adjust function is active. To enter the offset adjustment value manually (typically not needed), use the following softkeys: Stimulus > Frequency Offset > Offset Adjust > Adjust Value Sets or reads out the value of the offset SENS:OFFS:ADJ:VAL...
  • Page 494 To enable continuous adjustment, enter the time interval other than zero, use the following softkeys: Stimulus > Frequency Offset > Offset Adjust > Auto Adjust Period To disable continuous adjustment set the time interval equal to zero. Sets or reads out the adjust period in SENS:OFFS:ADJ:CONT:PER seconds when the frequency offset adjust function is active.

  • Page 495: State Saving And Data Output

    State Saving and Data Output The following section describes the processes of saving and recalling: · The set parameters of the Analyzer, calibration, measured, and memorized data are stored in the Analyzer status file and can be loaded repeatedly (See Analyzer States).

  • Page 496: Analyzer State

    Analyzer State The Analyzer state, calibration and measured data can be saved on the hard disk to an Analyzer state file and later uploaded back into the Analyzer software. The following four types of saving are available: State The Analyzer settings. State &...
  • Page 497 To have the Analyzer state automatically recalled after each start of the instrument use the Autorecall.sta file. Use the Autorecall softkey to save the corresponding file and thus enable this function. To disable the automatic recall of the Analyzer state, delete the Autorecall.sta file using the specific softkey.
  • Page 498 To save a state into one of the ten files, use the State01… State10 softkeys. A check mark in the left part of the softkey indicates that the state with the corresponding number is already saved. To save the state, which will be automatically recalled after each start of the Analyzer, use the Autorecall softkey.
  • Page 499 To recall a state from the file with an arbitrary name, use the File... softkey. MMEM:LOAD Recalls the specified Analyzer state file. Analyzer State Deleting To delete the Analyzer state file, use the following softkeys: Save/Recall > Delete State File... Then select the desired file to delete in the dialog box.

  • Page 500: Channel State

    Channel State A channel state and channel calibration can be saved into the Analyzer memory. The channel state saving procedure is similar to that of Analyzer state saving, and the same saving types (See Analyzer State) are applied to the channel state saving function.
  • Page 501 To clear the all channel state, use the Clear States softkeys. MMEM:STOR:CHAN:CLE Clears the memory of the channel state saved using the MMEM:STOR:CHAN command. Channel State Recalling To recall the active channel state, use the following softkeys: Save/Recall > Recall Channel Click the required softkey from those available: State A…...

  • Page 502: Calibration Saving/Recalling

    Calibration Saving/Recalling The calibration of a channel can be saved to a file. The file contains the frequency data, calibration coefficients and calibration info. The files have *.CAL extension and are saved in the \State subdirectory of the main application directory. Channel Calibration Saving To save the channel calibration, use the following softkeys: Save/Recall >...

  • Page 503: Trace Data Csv File

    Trace Data CSV File Trace data can be saved as a *.CSV file (comma separated values). The *.CSV file contains comment and trace data lines. Comments start from the «!» symbol. Before saving the *.CSV file, set the trace type, value delimiter type, and other parameters in the Save Trace Data submenu (See the table below).
  • Page 504 The trace data is saved to *.CSV in the following format: Comment F[0], Data1, Data2 F[1], Data1, Data2 . . . F[N], Data1, Data2 F[n] — frequency at measurement point n. Data1 — trace response in rectangular format, real part in Smith chart and polar format.
  • Page 505 To select the format for saving data, use the Format softkey. Then select the required format: · Displayed · Real-Imag · db-Angle MMEM:STOR:FDAT:FORM Sets the data format when the *.CSV file is saved using MMEM:STOR:FDAT command. To enable/disable recording in the header file, use the Comment softkey.
  • Page 506 CSV File Saving To save the trace data, use the following softkeys: Save/Recall > Save... Enter the file name in the dialog that appears. MMEM:STOR:FDAT Saves the data of one or several traces to a CSV file. Page 506...

  • Page 507: Trace Data Touchstone File

    Trace Data Touchstone File The Analyzer allows to save S-parameters to a Touchstone file. Files in this format are typical for most circuit simulator programs. The Touchstone file contains frequency values and S-parameters. The Touchstone file saving function is applied to individual channels. Activate the channel to use this function (See Selection of Active Trace/Channel).
  • Page 508 The *.S1P Touchstone file for one-port measurements: ! Comments # Hz S FMT R Z0 F[0] {S11}’ {S11}” F[1] {S11}’ {S11}” . . . F[N] {S11}’ {S11}” The *.S2P Touchstone file for two-port measurements: ! Comments # Hz S FMT R Z0 F[0] {S11}’...
  • Page 509 Hz — frequency measurement units (kHz, MHz, GHz); FMT — data format: · RI — real and imaginary parts; · MA — linear magnitude and phase in degrees; · DB — logarithmic magnitude in dB and phase in degrees; Z0 — reference impedance value; F[n] —...
  • Page 510 Then select the required Touchstone format: · Real-Imaginary · Magnitude-Angle · dB-Angle MMEM:STOR:SNP:FORM Sets and reads out the data format for the S- parameter. To select the Touchstone separator type, use the following softkeys: Save/Recall > Save Data To Touchstone File > Separator Then select the required Touchstone separator: ·...
  • Page 511 Enter the file name in the dialog that appears. MMEM:STOR:SNP Saves the measured S-parameters of the active channel into a Touchstone file. Page 511...
  • Page 512 Touchstone File Recalling The Analyzer allows to recall data from the Touchstone files. Data can be loaded to memory traces or to data traces. When loading data to data traces, the Analyzer switches to hold mode to avoid writing over the recalled data with current data. When loading data to the memory traces, the sweep hold does not occur.

  • Page 513: System Settings

    System Settings Analyzer Presetting The Analyzer presetting feature allows to restore the default settings of the Analyzer. The default settings of the Analyzer are specified in Default Settings Table. To preset the Analyzer, use the following softkeys: System > Preset > OK SYST:PRES Resets the Analyzer to factory settings.

  • Page 514: Graph Printing

    Graph Printing This section describes the print/save procedures for graph data. The print function is provided with the preview feature, which allows to view the image to be printed on the screen, and/or save it to a file. The graphs can be printed using three different applications: ·...
  • Page 515 To open a print menu, use the following softkeys: System > Print Then select the printing application, using one of the following softkeys: · Print: MS Word · Print: Windows · Print: Embedded · Print: To File HCOP Prints out the image displayed on the screen without previewing.
  • Page 516 HCOP:IMAG Sets or reads out the color chart for the image printout. Page 516...

  • Page 517: Reference Frequency Oscillator Selection

    Reference Frequency Oscillator Selection The Analyzer can operate either with an internal or external reference frequency (10 MHz) oscillator. Initially, the Analyzer is set to operate using the internal source of the reference frequency. An external high stability oscillator can be used if more accuracy and frequency stability is required.

  • Page 518: System Correction Setting

    System Correction Setting The Analyzer is supplied by the manufacturer calibrated with calibration coefficients stored in its non-volatile memory. The factory calibration is used by default for the initial correction of the measured S-parameters. Such calibration is referred to as system calibration, and error correction is referred to as system correction.

  • Page 519: Power Trip Function

    Power Trip Function Port overload can occur when testing active devices. The power trip function is a safety feature to keep the Analyzer’s port from overloading. The function is triggered when the port safety power level is exceeded. When triggered, this function disables the stimulus signal and displays the following message in the instrument status bar:...

  • Page 520: Network Settings

    Network Settings Network settings are used to enable remote control of the Analyzer. To enable/disable remote control of the Analyzer via a network using HiSLIP protocol on, use the following softkeys: System > Misc Setup > Network Remote Control Settings > HiSLIP Server > [ON | OFF] If necessary, specify the port number, use the following softkeys: System >...
  • Page 521 To enable/disable remote control of the Analyzer via a network using TCP/IP Socket protocol on, use the following softkeys: System > Misc Setup > Network Remote Control Settings > Socket Server > [ON | OFF] If necessary, specify the port number, use the following softkeys: System >...
  • Page 522 NOTE Remote control of the Analyzer is not possible using two interfaces simultaneously. A Socket or network must be selected. When specifying the port number, make sure that it is not busy performing another process. For more information about remote control of the Analyzer, see in Programming.

  • Page 523: Power Meter Settings

    Power Meter Settings An external power meter can be connected to the Analyzer to perform a power calibration of the test ports. Connect the power meter to the PC directly via USB port or via USB/GPIB adapter. Then, install the power meter software. The list of power meters supported by the Analyzer is shown in the table below.
  • Page 524 Supported power meters Designation Power Connection in the VNA Additional Software Sensor Type Software · R&S®NRP-Z R&S NRP-Z R&S®NRP-Toolkit Power Power Windows Sensors Sensors · VXIplug&play x64 or x86 driver rsnrpz R&S®NRVS R&S NRVS GPIB or USB · VISA Library from any Power Meter GRIB Power...
  • Page 525 Designation Power Connection in the VNA Additional Software Sensor Type Software Keysight Keysight U848x Power U848x VISA Library from any vendor Sensors Power (visa32.dll) Sensors Keysight Keysight U200x Power U200x VISA Library from any vendor Sensors Power (visa32.dll) Sensors To select the power meter, use the following softkeys: System >...
  • Page 526 If an NI USB-568x Power Sensor is selected, set its resource name to VISA using Resource Name and confirm the selection with the Select softkey. The Resource name for this power sensor must be carried over from NI Measurement & Automation Explorer (MAX). If an R&S NRVS GPIB power meter is selected, set the GPIB board address and the power meter address in the bus and confirm the selection with the Select softkey.

  • Page 527: Beeper Settings

    Beeper Settings The Analyzer features two available beeper settings, which can be toggled on/off independently from each other: · Operation complete beeper — informs about normal completion of standard measurements during calibration. · Warning beeper — informs about an error or a fail limit test result. To toggle the operation complete beeper, use the following softkeys: System >...

  • Page 528: Security Level

    Security Level The software provides three levels of security: · None · · High The frequency indication is disabled when the security level is Low or High. When the security level is High, it is only possible to turn on the frequency indication after a complete reset of the Analyzer or by loading the analyzer state file, which also leads to a complete reset of the previous Analyzer state.
  • Page 529 Security Level ON Select the level of security in the menu: System > Misc Setup > Security Level > [None | Low | High] Page 529...

  • Page 530: Language

    Language The default language for software is English. The software can be localized for any language. Contact technical support at the https://coppermountaintech.com/support-request/ website if the software does not have the desired language available. To select the interface language, use the following softkeys: System >...

  • Page 531: Create Localize Language File

    Create Localize Language File To localize, do the following: · Find the lang_template.txt file in the VNA application home directory in the \System\Lang folder; · Rename this file to the lang_xx.txt, where xx is the two-letter language code, for example, lang_сh.txt. ·...
  • Page 532 To select the interface language, use the following softkeys: System > Misc Setup > Language Page 532...

  • Page 533: Screen Update Setting

    Screen Update Setting Screen updating can be disabled to reduce the sweep time. This function can be useful when remotely controlling the Analyzer via COM/DCOM interfaces. A single trace update is possible when screen update is disabled. Click on the trace with the mouse or hover the mouse over the graticule labels.

  • Page 534: User Interface Setting

    User Interface Setting The software allows to adjust the following user interface settings: · Toggle between full screen and window display (See Full Screen). · The font size of all displayed items (See Font Size). · Style and width of data traces, memory traces, graph grid (See Trace and grid styles).

  • Page 535: Full Screen

    Full Screen The software on the PC screen is displayed as a window. If necessary, use full screen mode. To toggle between full screen and window display, use the following softkeys: Display > Properties > Full Screen Page 535...

  • Page 536: Font Size

    Font Size The default font size setting for all items is 14. The font size of all displayed items can be changed. The font size can be changed to any size between 10 to 22. To change the font size, use the following softkeys: Display >...
  • Page 537 To change the font size by categories of displayed items, use the following softkeys: Display > Properties > Font > Item Font Size To turn on the font size selection by category, use the following softkeys: Display > Properties > Font > Item Font Size > Item Font Size [ ON | OFF ] Select displayed items to customize: ·...

  • Page 538: Trace And Grid Styles

    Trace and Grid Styles The style and width of data and memory traces and graph grid can be changed. The width of a data and memory traces ranges from 1 to 3 pixels. The line style of the trace and grid can also be customized: choose between solid, dash, dot, and dash-dot (See the figure below).
  • Page 539 To change the style and width of a memory trace, use the following softkeys: Display > Properties > Lines > Mem Trace Style > [Solid | Dash | Dot | Dash-dot] Display > Properties > Lines > Mem Trace Width To change the grid style, the following softkeys: Display >...

  • Page 540: Olor

    olor The color of data and memory traces, markers, the background, and the grid can be changed if necessary. To change the color by categories of displayed items, use the following softkeys: Display > Properties > Colors Select displayed items to customize: ·...
  • Page 541 Alternatively, press the Select Color... softkey and go to the Microsoft Windows color palette. Select color and click OK. DISP:COL:TRAC:DATA Sets or reads out the data trace color. DISP:COL:TRAC:MEM Sets or reads out the data trace color. DISP:COL:BACK Sets or reads out the background color for trace display.

  • Page 542: Invert Color Of Diagram

    Invert Color of Diagram By default, the diagram is in dark color mode. The color mode can be switched to light mode. Dark Mode of Diagram (by default) Page 542...
  • Page 543 Light Color Mode of Diagram To change the color mode of diagram, use the following softkeys: Display > Properties > Invert Color DISP:IMAG Turns the inversion of display colors of the trace area ON/OFF. Page 543...

  • Page 544: Hide/Show Menu Bar

    Hide/Show Menu Bar By default, the menu bar is located at the top of the screen (See figure below). The menu bar can be optionally hidden to gain more screen space for the channel window and is controlled by mouse. Menu Bar ON Menu Bar OFF To hide/show the menu bar, use the following softkeys:...

  • Page 545: Hide/Show Horizontal Graticule Label

    Hide/Show Horizontal Graticule Label Horizontal graticule label is located at the down of the screen (See figure below). The horizontal graticule label can be hidden to gain more screen space for the trace display. Horizontal graticule label ON Horizontal graticule label OFF To hide/show horizontal graticule label, use the following softkeys: Display >...

  • Page 546: Set Vertical Graticule Label

    Set Vertical Graticule Label Vertical graticule label is located at the left of the screen (See figure below). By default, the scale of the active chart trace is displayed. If necessary, the display of the scales of all traces can be enabled or disabled to gain more screen space for the trace display (See figure below).
  • Page 547 To open vertical graticule label submenu, use the following softkeys: Display > Properties > Graticule Label [ ON|OFF ] Then select display type of vertical graticule label: · · Active Trace · All Traces DISP:GLAB Sets/gets the Graticule Label state. Page 547...

  • Page 548: Hide/Show Sweep Mark

    Hide/Show Sweep Mark The sweep mark is visible during measurement if the measurement cycle time is long, due to a narrow IF filter bandwidth or a large number of measurement points (See figure below). If necessary, the sweep mark can be hidden. Sweep mark To hide/show sweep mark, use the following softkeys: Display >...

  • Page 549: Hide/Show Date And Time

    Hide/Show Date and Time System date and time display is located on the analyzer status bar. If necessary, date and/or time can be turned OFF. System date and time show in the analyzer status bar System date and time hide in the analyzer status bar To enable/disable the current date in the analyzer status bar, use the following softkeys: Display >...

  • Page 550: Cycle Time

    Cycle Time The cycle time is the interval between the start of two adjacent sweeps. By default, the cycle time isn't displayed in the Analyzer status bar (See Sweep time). It can be enabled if necessary. Depending on the selected method, the cycle time can be defined as: ·...
  • Page 551 Restarts the averaging or maximum hold of the SYST:CYCL:TIME:REST cycle time measurement. Page 551...

  • Page 552: Interface Presetting

    Interface Presetting All set user interface settings can be reset. To restore the interface settings to the default factory settings, use the following softkeys: Display > Properties > Set Defaults DISP:COL:RES Restores the display settings to the default values. Page 552...

  • Page 553: Save/Load Display Setting

    Save/Load Display Setting The user interface settings can be recorded in a *.CFG file. To save the display settings in file, use the following softkeys: Display > Properties > Save Display Settings Enter the file name in the dialog that appears. To load the display settings from file, use the following softkeys: Display >...

  • Page 554: Simulation Mode

    Simulation Mode Simulation mode is designed to simulate DUT measurement. The measurement results of the DUT are pre-recorded in the software memory. Simulation mode is turned on by the command line parameter (See Command Line Parameters). Also Simulation mode turns on automatically if the Analyzer hardware does not exist. Page 554...

  • Page 555: Plugins

    Plugins A plugin is an executable file that performs the user defined function using COM automation or SCPI commands of the VNA application. Create own plugin or download the plugin from the https://coppermountaintech.com/software-plug-ins/ website. Place the plugin in the VNA software home directory in the "plugins" folder. The Plugin softkey will become active after placing the plugin in the specified folder.

  • Page 556: About

    About The Analyzer model name, serial number, software and hardware versions, the temperature, current consumption, verification date can be found in the System menu. About To request information, use the following softkeys: System > About... Page 556...

  • Page 557: Programming

    Programming The Analyzer can be programmed using: · IVI-C driver; · IVI.NET driver; · LabView driver; · SCPI commands. This section describes SCPI command set of the Analyzer. Instrument drivers are described in separate help files (See File Locations). SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) defines a standard for syntax and commands to use in controlling programmable instruments.

  • Page 558: Connection Setup

    Connection Setup To enable remote control of the Analyzer, turn on the HiSLIP server and/or Socket server in the settings of the analyzer's program. The default TCP/IP port number of each protocol can be changed optionally. HiSLIP is a TCP/IP-based protocol specially designed for measuring and test equipment.

  • Page 559: Analyzer Setting

    Analyzer Setting For remote access to the Analyzer, make the following settings in its program: · Enable HiSLIP server and/or Socket server. · Configure the TCP/IP port number (optional). NOTE Configuring the TCP/IP port number is necessary only where several analyzer programs are simultaneously executed on the same PC, and these programs require remote control.

  • Page 560: Client Setting

    Client Setting Typically, the client uses the VISA library to establish connection to analyzer software. The easiest way to configure the network connection with the Analyzer is using a special utility from VISA package (for example, NI-MAX, Keysight Connection Expert). Following the manual for the above utilities, add a new network device —...

  • Page 561: Visa Library

    VISA Library Using the VISA (Virtual Instrument Software Architecture) library is the most common approach. The VISA library is a widely used software input-output interface in the field of testing and measurement for controlling devices from a PC. It is a library of functions for C/C ++, C #, Visual Basic, MATLAB, LabVIEW and others.

  • Page 562: Network And Local Configuration

    Network and Local Configuration A local configuration involves executing the user program on the PXI controller. The network configuration involves executing the user program on a separate PC connected to the PXI controller by a local area network. The figure below shows the local configuration on the left and the network configuration on the right.
  • Page 563 NOTE The network configuration does not restrict the client in choice of OS. The local configuration limits the client in choice of OS — only Windows. Page 563...

  • Page 564: Multiple Analyzers On Pxi Chassis

    Multiple Analyzers on PXI Chassis The section describes in detail how to configure the remote control of the multiple PXI analyzer programs executed simultaneously on a single chassis. · Assign a unique TCP/IP port number for each Analyzer on the PXI chassis for the HiSLIP or Socket protocol used.

  • Page 565: Differences In Use Of Hislip And Socket Protocols

    Differences in Use of HiSLIP and Socket Protocols The section describes the differences in the methods of writing user programs due to the use of different HiSLIP and TCP/IP Socket protocols. It is assumed that the user program works through the VISA library. The brief list of differences is given below: 1.

  • Page 566: Terminal Character In Messages To Analyzer

    Terminal Character in Messages to Analyzer The user program sends variable-length text messages to the analyzer. The end of the message, according to IEEE488.2, is terminated either by protocol means (not by a symbol), or by the symbol <newline> ('\n', 0x0A, 10), or both methods together. The HiSLIP has a mechanism for transmitting the end of the message by protocol means, while the Socket protocol does not.

  • Page 567: Terminal Character In Analyzer Responses

    Terminal Character in Analyzer Responses When using the HiSLIP protocol, the analyzer terminates messages with the symbol <newline> + the protocol defined end of message (not symbolic). When using the Socket protocol, the analyzer terminates messages only with the <newline> symbol, since the Socket protocol does not have the protocol defined end of message.

  • Page 568: Interrupted Error

    Interrupted Error The HiSLIP protocol meets the requirements of the IEEE Std 488.2 message exchange protocol to detect an interrupted error. The interrupted error indicates that the Analyzer received an incoming message (command or query) before the client accepted a response from the previous request. In other words, the client is required to read the result of each query before sending the next query or command.

  • Page 569: Ieee488.2 Status Reporting System

    IEEE488.2 Status Reporting System The HiSLIP protocol fully supports the analyzer's IEEE488.2 Status Reporting System described in the appendix, while the Socket protocol supports it only partially. The Socket protocol does not support the following functions: · The MAV (message available) bit in the Status Byte. ·...

  • Page 570: Transfer Of Binary Data

    Transfer of Binary Data By default, data from the Analyzer is sent in text form. To increase the speed of the data exchange, the user has the option to enable binary data transfer. The transfer of binary data is enabled by the FORMat:DATA command and is effective for commands that transfer large data amounts.

  • Page 571: Scpi Overview

    SCPI Overview The Analyzer implements a set of commands based on the standard SCPI-1999 (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments). This is a set of instructions for the exchange of textual messages. SCPI was developed by the SCPI Consortium (currently supported by the IVI Foundation).

  • Page 572: Messages

    Messages The SCPI is a text message-oriented protocol. The commands are sent as character messages. One message can contain one or several commands. The answer from the instrument is read out as a text message by default. Optionally, an instrument can be programmed to output binary data.

  • Page 573: Command Tree

    Command Tree The SCPI commands are organized in a tree structure. For example: Each tree structure forms a functional system. The base of the tree is called the root, e.g. MEASure and SYSTem. Each functional system can have subsystems of lower level.
  • Page 574 The tree can contain subsystems and leaves with the same names if they belong to different branches, e.g. CENTer leaf is on the tips of different branches: :SOURce :SENSe :POWer :FREQuency :CENTer :CENTer Page 574...

  • Page 575: Subsystems

    Subsystems A colon (':') separates the subsystems. The subsystems which follow the colon are on a lower level. For example, in command: :SOURce:POWer:STARt the start power STARt is a part of the POWer subsystem, which is a part of the SOURce subsystem.

  • Page 576: Optional Subsystems

    Optional Subsystems Some subsystems can be specified as optional, if omission of such a subsystem will not lead to ambiguity. This means that the subsystem can be omitted in the command line. The optional subsystems are bracketed ("[]"). For example, if the full command specification is written as: SOURce:POWer[:LEVel]:SLOPe[:DATA] subsystems LEVel and DATA are optional.

  • Page 577: Long And Short Formats

    Long and Short Formats Each keyword in a command specification has a long format and a short format. The short format of a command is indicated by capital letters. For example, a command specification: SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer can be written as: SENS:FREQ:CENT SENS:FREQ:CENTer Only one form can be used at a time, as combining forms will be incorrect.

  • Page 578: Case Sensitivity

    Case Sensitivity The commands are not case sensitive. Upper case and lower case letters are only used to indicate the long and short formats of a command specification. For example, the following commands are equivalent: SENS:FREQ:STAR sens:freq:star Page 578...

  • Page 579: Parameters

    Parameters The commands can have parameters. The parameters are separated from the command by a space. If a command has several parameters, they are separated by commas (','). Page 579...

  • Page 580: Numeric Values

    Numeric Values The numeric values are integers or real numbers. These parameters can have measurement units. For example: SENS:FREQ 1000000000 SENS:FREQ 1000 MHz SENS:FREQ 1 GHz SENS:FREQ 1E9 Page 580...

  • Page 581: Multiplier Prefixes

    Multiplier Prefixes The SCPI standard allows specification of the numeric values with multiplier prefix to the measurement units. Prefix Multiplier 1e-18 1e-15 1e-12 1e-9 1e-6 1e-3 1e12 1e15 1e18 There are two exceptions to the above designation: prefix M in combination with HZ or OHM means 1e6 (Mega), and not 1e–3 (milli), i.e.

  • Page 582: Notations

    Notations The SCPI standard allows numeric value specification in different notations. Decimal notation is used by default. To use other notations, specify the numeric values in the following way: Notation Prefix Example Binary #B11001010 = 202 Octal #Q107 = 71 Hexadecimal #H10FF = 4351 Page 582...

  • Page 583: Booleans

    Booleans The Booleans can assume two values: logical yes and logical no (ON and OFF), and are specified in command as: ON or 1 — logical yes OFF or 0 — logical no For example: DISPlay:ENABle OFF DISPlay:ENABle 0 Page 583...

  • Page 584: Character Data

    Character Data The SCPI standard allows specification of parameters as character data, as in the following command: TRIGger:SOURce {BUS|IMMediate|EXTernal} where "BUS", "IMMediate", "EXTernal" is the possible values of the character data. The character data has a long and short format, and the formats are specified in accordance with the same rules as described in Long and Short Formats.

  • Page 585: String Parameters

    String Parameters In some cases, the Analyzer can accept parameters made of character strings. Such strings are enclosed with single quotes (') or double quotes ("). For example, the file name in the state saving command: MMEMory:STORe "state01.sta" Page 585...

  • Page 586: Numeric Lists

    Numeric Lists The numeric lists (<numeric list>) are used to specify a variable number of numerical parameters, for example: CALC:LIMit:DATA 2,1,1E9,3E9,0,0,2,1E9,3E9,–3,–3 Page 586...

  • Page 587: Query Commands

    Query Commands The query commands read out the parameter values from the Analyzer. After a query command has been sent, the response should return via remote control interface. The query commands have a question mark ('?') at the end of the command. Many of the commands have two forms.

  • Page 588: Numeric Suffixes

    Numeric Suffixes The Analyzer contains several items of the same type, such as 16 channels, each of which in turn contains 16 traces, etc. A numeric suffix is used to denote the item number in a command. The suffix is added to the keyword of the item (channel, trace, etc.).

  • Page 589: Compound Commands

    Compound Commands It is possible to enter more than one command in the same command line. The commands in the line are separated by a semicolon (';'). The specification of the first command is valid for the following command, except for the last leaf before the semicolon.

  • Page 590: Ieee488.2 Common Commands Overview

    IEEE488.2 Common Commands Overview A SCPI compatible Analyzer must support a set of common commands of the IEEE488.2 standard. These commands start with an asterisk ('*'). The list of such commands can be seen below: *CLS *ESE *ESE? *ESR? *IDN? *OPC *OPC? *RST...

  • Page 591: Internal Data Arrays

    Internal Data Arrays This section describes the internal data arrays, access to them, as well as their position in the internal data flow of the Analyzer (See figure below). For a description of internal data processing, see Internal Data Processing. To search for SCPI commands related to arrays and processes, click "SCPI"...
  • Page 592 Channel Data Processing Page 592...
  • Page 593 Channel data processing of the Analyzer consists of the following arrays: · Raw Receivers Data Arrays are obtained as a result of analog-to-digital conversion and digital filtering of analog signals received by the receivers. If averaging is enabled, then the array elements are averaged pointwise over N sweep cycles.
  • Page 594 In the following data arrays: FIFO memory, Corrected Data, and Corrected Memory, the odd array elements contain the real part of the data, the even ones contain the imaginary part of the data. The arrays of Formatted Data and Formatted Memory, depending on the selected data format, contain data of various types (See table).
  • Page 595 Trace Data Processing · FIFO Memory is the queue of memory arrays type "first-in-first-out" basis. The next array is saved in FIFO as the result of activating the "Data-> Memory" function. The Page 595...
  • Page 596 measurement (S-parameter or receiver data) of the associated trace is copied to the array. By default, the FIFO depth (size) is one, which means each trace has one associated memory array. When the FIFO function is enabled, the queue depth increases to eight.
  • Page 597 · Stimulus Data Array contains the channel stimulus values for all measurement points. The data is available for reading using the SCPI command SENS:FREQ:DATA?. Page 597...

  • Page 598: Command Reference

    Command Reference Conventions The following conventions are used throughout this section. Syntax The following symbols are used in command syntax: Identifiers enclosed in angular brackets indicate that a particular <> type of data must be specified. Parts enclosed in square brackets can be omitted. Parts enclosed in curly brackets indicate that you must select one of the items in this part.
  • Page 599 Identifier Parameter Description <numeric list> Numeric List <numeric 1>,<numeric 2>,...<numeric N> Boolean <bool> {0|1|ON|OFF} parameter Character Predefined set of character strings without <char> parameter quotes <port> Port Number <integer> String <string> Quoted string parameter Equivalent COM Command The Analyzer command system description is based on the SCPI command system because this system is used primarily in this manual.

  • Page 600: Scpi Command Tree

    SCPI Command Tree ABORt Aborts all sweeps. CALCulate Data processing (conversion, electrical delay, phase offset, gating, fixture simulation, trace hold, smoothing, time domain), trace analysis, limit tests, markers, trace memory, math, statistic, trace data transfer. DISPlay Display settings. FORMat Trace format. HCOPy Hardcopy printing.

  • Page 601: Ieee488.2 Common Commands

    IEEE488.2 Common Commands The set of common commands of IEEE488.2 standard. These commands start with an asterix ("*"). Command Description Status Clear status *CLS System Event status enable *ESE Event status enable register *ESR? Identify *IDN? Operation complete command *OPC Operation complete query *OPC? Reset...

  • Page 602: Cls

    *CLS SCPI Command *CLS Description Clears the following: · Error Queue. · Status Byte Register. · Standard Event Status Register. · Operation Status Event Register. · Questionable Status Event Register. · Questionable Limit Status Event Register. · Questionable Limit Channel Status Event Register. no query Target Status Reporting System...

  • Page 603: Ese

    *ESE SCPI Command *ESE <numeric> *ESE? Description Sets or reads out the value of the Standard Event Status Enable Register. command/query Target Status Reporting System Parameter <numeric> 0 to 255 Query Response <numeric> Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys None Back to IEEE488.2 Common Commands Page 603...

  • Page 604: Esr

    *ESR? SCPI Command *ESR? Description Reads out the value of the Standard Event Status Register. Executing this command clears the register value. query only Target Status Reporting System Query Response <numeric> Equivalent Softkeys None Back to IEEE488.2 Common Commands Page 604...

  • Page 605: Idn

    *IDN? SCPI Command *IDN? Description Reads out the Analyzer identification string. query only Target Analyzer Query Response The identification string in format: <manufacturer>, <model>, <serial number>, <software version>/<hardware version>. For example: CMT, C1209, 08080188, 16.2/01 Equivalent Softkeys None Back to IEEE488.2 Common Commands Page 605...

  • Page 606: Opc

    *OPC SCPI Command *OPC Description Sets the OPC bit (bit 0) of the Standard Event Status Register at the completion of all pending operations. The pending operation caused by the command TRIG:SING only. no query Target Status Reporting System Equivalent Softkeys None Back to IEEE488.2 Common Commands...

  • Page 607: Opc

    *OPC? SCPI Command *OPC? Description Reads out the "1" at the completion of all pending operations. The query blocks the execution of the user program until execution of all previous instructions. The query *OPC? can be used for waiting for the end of a sweep initiated by the command TRIG:SING.

  • Page 608: Rst

    *RST SCPI Command *RST Description Restores the default settings of the Analyzer. There is difference from presetting the Analyzer with SYST:PRES command – in this case all channels are set to Hold. no query Target Analyzer Related Commands SYST:PRES Equivalent Softkeys None Back to IEEE488.2 Common Commands...

  • Page 609: Sre

    *SRE SCPI Command *SRE <numeric> *SRE? Description Sets or reads out the value of the Service Request Enable Register. command/query Target Status Reporting System Parameter <numeric> 0 to 255 Query Response <numeric> Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys None Back to IEEE488.2 Common Commands Page 609...

  • Page 610: Stb

    *STB? SCPI Command *STB? Description Reads out the value of the Status Byte Register. query only Target Status Reporting System Query Response <numeric> Equivalent Softkeys None Back to IEEE488.2 Common Commands Page 610...

  • Page 611: Trg

    *TRG SCPI Command *TRG Description Generates a trigger signal and initiates a sweep under the following conditions. 1. Trigger source is set to the BUS (set by the command TRIG:SOUR BUS), otherwise an error occurs and the command is ignored. 2.

  • Page 612: Tst

    *TST? SCPI Command *TST? Description Reads out the analyzer self-test result. 0 indicates no failures found. A non-zero value indicates one or more of failure conditions exist. The SYST:TEST? query returns a textual description of the failures. Note: the query returns a non-zero value when it is issued until the instrument is ready.

  • Page 613: Wai

    *WAI SCPI Command *WAI Description Waits till the completion of all pending commands. The only command that can be pending is the TRIG:SING command. In absence of a pending command TRIG:SING the command *WAI is equivalent to an empty operation. A query that follows the command *WAI blocks the execution of the user program till the completion of the command TRIG:SING, similarly to the query *OPC?.

  • Page 614: Abor

    ABOR SCPI Command ABORt Description Aborts the sweep. The channels in the Single trigger initiation mode transfer to the Hold state. The channels in the Continuous trigger initiation mode transfer to the trigger waiting state. If the trigger source is set to Internal, the channel immediately starts a new sweep.
  • Page 615 Page 615...

  • Page 616: Calculate

    CALCulate Command Description CALC:CONV S-parameter Conversion ON/OFF Conversion CALC:CONV:FUNC Conversion type CALC:CORR:EDEL:DIST Electrical Delay Equivalent distance CALL:CORR:EDEL:DIST:UNIT Distance units CALC:CORR:EDEL:MED Media CALC:CORR:EDEL:RVEL Velocity factor CALC:CORR:EDEL:TIME Electrical delay CALC:CORR:EDEL:WAV:CUT Waveguide cutoff frequency CALC:CORR:OFFS:PHAS Phase Offset Value of the phase offset CALC:CORR:STAT? Misc Calibration Interpolation/extrapolation status...
  • Page 617 Command Description CALC:DATA:SDAT Corrected data array CALC:DATA:SMEM Corrected memory array CALC:DATA:XAX? X-axis values array CALC:FILT:TIME Gating Gate type CALC:FILT:TIME:CENT Gate center CALC:FILT:TIME:SHAP Gate shape CALC:FILT:TIME:SPAN Gate span CALC:FILT:TIME:STAR Gate start CALC:FILT:TIME:STAT Gating function ON/OFF CALC:FILT:TIME:STOP Gate stop CALC:FORM Channel and Trace Trace format Settings CALC:PAR:COUN...
  • Page 618 Command Description CALC:FSIM:SEND:DEEM:STAT Two-port Network De- De-embedding ON/OFF embedding CALC:FSIM:SEND:DEEM:PORT:STAT De-embedding for specified port ON/OFF CALC:FSIM:SEND:DEEM:PORT:USER:FIL Name of *.S2P touchstone file of the de-embedded circuit CALC:FSIM:SEND:PMC:STAT Two-port Network Embedding ON/OFF Embedding CALC:FSIM:SEND:PMC:PORT:STAT Embedding for specified port ON/OFF CALC:FSIM:SEND:PMC:PORT:USER:FIL Name of *.S2P Touchstone file of the embedded circuit CALC:FSIM:SEND:ZCON:PORT:Z0 Port Impedance...
  • Page 619 Command Description CALC:FSIM:STAT Fixture Simulation Fixture simulation ON/OFF Function CALC:FUNC:DATA? Trace Analysis Analysis result data array CALC:FUNC:DOM Arbitrary sweep range ON/OFF CALC:FUNC:DOM:COUP Coupling range ON/OFF CALC:FUNC:DOM:STAR Analysis range start CALC:FUNC:DOM:STOP Analysis range stop CALC:FUNC:EXEC Execute analysis CALC:FUNC:PEXC Lower limit for the peak excursion value CALC:FUNC:POIN? Number of points (data pairs) CALC:FUNC:PPOL...
  • Page 620 Command Description CALC:FUNC:TYPE Analysis type CALC:HOLD:TYPE Trace Hold Trace hold type CALC:HOLD:CLE Trace hold restart CALC:LIM Limit Test Limit test ON/OFF CALC:LIM:DATA Limit line table CALC:LIM:DISP Limits display ON/OFF CALC:LIM:FAIL? Limit test result CALC:LIM:OFFS:AMPL Limit line Y-offset CALC:LIM:OFFS:MARK Limit line Y-offset to active marker value CALC:LIM:OFFS:STIM Limit line X-offset CALC:LIM:REP:ALL?
  • Page 621 Command Description CALC:MARK Marker Properties Marker ON/OFF CALC:MARK:ACT Sets active marker CALC:MARK:COUN Number of markers CALC:MARK:COUP Coupling of markers ON/OFF CALC:MARK:DATA? Response and stimulus values of all trace marker CALC:MARK:DISC Marker discrete mode ON/OFF CALC:MARK:REF Reference marker ON/OFF CALC:MARK:X Stimulus value of marker CALC:MARK:Y? Response value of marker CALC:MARK:BWID...
  • Page 622 Command Description CALC:MARK:BWID:TYPE Type of search CALC:MARK:FUNC:DOM Marker Search Arbitrary search range ON/OFF CALC:MARK:FUNC:DOM:COUP Coupling of marker search ranges ON/OFF CALC:MARK:FUNC:DOM:STAR Start of the marker search range CALC:MARK:FUNC:DOM:STOP Stop of the marker search range CALC:MARK:FUNC:EXEC Executes search CALC:MARK:FUNC:PEXC Peak excursion value CALC:MARK:FUNC:PPOL Peak polarity CALC:MARK:FUNC:TARG...
  • Page 623 Command Description CALC:MARK:MATH:FLAT:STAT Marker flatness ON/OFF CALC:MARK:MATH:FLAT:DOM:STAR Marker specifying start of frequency range CALC:MARK:MATH:FLAT:DOM:STOP Marker specifying stop of frequency range CALC:MARK:SET Marker Functions Sets item value according to the position of the marker CALC:MATH:FUNC Memory Trace Function Math operation CALC:MATH:MEM Data =>...
  • Page 624 Command Description CALC:PAR:SPOR Number of the stimulus port for an absolute measurements or DC Voltage measurements CALC:RLIM Ripple Limit Test Ripple limit test ON/OFF CALC:RLIM:DATA Ripple limit line table CALC:RLIM:DISP:LINE Ripple Limit line display ON/OFF CALC:RLIM:DISP:SEL Number of band for ripple value display CALC:RLIM:DISP:VAL Display type of ripple value CALC:RLIM:FAIL?
  • Page 625 Command Description CALC:TRAN:TIME:DC:VAL DC value CALC:TRAN:TIME:EXTR:DC DC extrapolation ON/OFF CALC:TRAN:TIME:IMP:WIDT Impulse Width CALC:TRAN:TIME:KBES Kaiser-Bessel β CALC:TRAN:TIME:LPFR Sets requency Low-Pass CALC:TRAN:TIME:REFL:TYPE Selects One way/Round trip CALC:TRAN:TIME:SPAN Time domain Span CALC:TRAN:TIME:STAR Time domain Start CALC:TRAN:TIME:STOP Time domain Stop CALC:TRAN:TIME:STAT Time domain transformation ON/OFF CALC:TRAN:TIME:STEP:RTIM Step rise time CALC:TRAN:TIME:STIM...

  • Page 626: Calc:conv

    CALC:CONV SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:CONVersion[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:CONVersion[:STATe]? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:CONVersion[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:CONVersion[:STATe]? Description Turns the S–parameter conversion function ON/OFF. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr> = {[1]|2|...16} Parameter {ON|1} {OFF|0} Query Response {0|1}...
  • Page 627 Preset Value Related Commands CALC:CONV:FUNC Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Conversion > Conversion Back to CALCulate Page 627...

  • Page 628: Calc:conv:func

    CALC:CONV:FUNC SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:CONVersion:FUNCtion <char> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:CONVersion:FUNCtion? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:CONVersion:FUNCtion <char> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:CONVersion:FUNCtion? Description Sets or reads out the S-parameter conversion function type. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr> = {[1]|2|...16} Parameter <char>...
  • Page 629 INVersion Inverse S-parameter ZTSHunt Shunt equivalent impedance YTSHunt Shunt equivalent admittance CONJugation S-parameter conjugate Query Response {ZREF|ZTR|YREF|YTR|INV|ZTSH|YTSH|CONJ} Preset Value ZREF Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Conversion > {Zr | Zt | Yr | Yt | 1/S | Z Trans–Shunt | Y Trans–Shunt | Conjugation} Back to CALCulate...

  • Page 630: Calc:corr:edel:dist

    CALC:CORR:EDEL:DIST SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:CORRection:EDELay:DISTance <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:CORRection:EDELay:DISTance? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:CORRection:EDELay:DISTance <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:CORRection:EDELay:DISTance? Description Sets or reads out the value of the equivalent distance in the electrical delay function. command/query Description CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch>...
  • Page 631 Query Response <numeric> Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Scale > Electrical Delay > Distance Back to CALCulate Page 631...

  • Page 632: Calc:corr:edel:dist:unit

    CALC:CORR:EDEL:DIST:UNIT SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:CORRection:EDELay:DISTance:UNITs <char> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:CORRection:EDELay:DISTance:UNITs? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:CORRection:EDELay:DISTance:UNITs <char> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:CORRection:EDELay:DISTance:UNITs? Description Sets or reads out the distance units in the electrical delay function. command/query Description CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr>...
  • Page 633 Query Response {MET|FEET|INCH} Preset Value METer Equivalent Softkeys Scale > Electrical Delay > Distance Units > {Meter | Feet | Inches} Back to CALCulate Page 633...

  • Page 634: Calc:corr:edel:med

    CALC:CORR:EDEL:MED SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:CORRection:EDELay:MEDia <char> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:CORRection:EDELay:MEDia? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:CORRection:EDELay:MEDia <char> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:CORRection:EDELay:MEDia? Description Sets or reads out the type of media in the electrical delay function. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr>...
  • Page 635 Query Response {COAX|WAV} Preset Value COAX Equivalent Softkeys Scale > Electrical Delay > Media > {Coax | Waveguide} Back to CALCulate Page 635...

  • Page 636: Calc:corr:edel:rvel

    CALC:CORR:EDEL:RVEL SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:CORRection:EDELay:RVELocity <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:CORRection:EDELay:RVELocity? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:CORRection:EDELay:RVELocity <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:CORRection:EDELay:RVELocity? Description Sets or reads out the value of the velocity factor used to calculate between delay and distance in the electrical delay function. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>...
  • Page 637 Query Response <numeric> Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Scale > Electrical Delay > Velocity Factor Back to CALCulate Page 637...

  • Page 638: Calc:corr:edel:time

    CALC:CORR:EDEL:TIME SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:CORRection:EDELay:TIME <time> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:CORRection:EDELay:TIME? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:CORRection:EDELay:TIME <time> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:CORRection:EDELay:TIME? Description Sets or reads out the value of the electrical delay. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr> = {[1]|2|...16} Parameter <time>...
  • Page 639 Query Response <numeric> Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Scale > Electrical Delay> Electrical Delay Back to CALCulate Page 639...

  • Page 640: Calc:corr:edel:wav:cut

    CALC:CORR:EDEL:WAV:CUT SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:CORRection:EDELay:WAVeguide:CUToff <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:CORRection:EDELay:WAVeguide:CUToff? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:CORRection:EDELay:WAVeguide:CUToff <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:CORRection:EDELay:WAVeguide:CUToff? Description Sets or reads out the value of the waveguide cutoff frequency in the electrical delay function if the type of media set to the "WAVeguide" by the command CALC:CORR:EDEL:MED. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] —...
  • Page 641 Query Response <numeric> Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Scale > Electrical Delay > Waveguide Cutoff Back to CALCulate Page 641...

  • Page 642: Calc:corr:offs:phas

    CALC:CORR:OFFS:PHAS SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:CORRection:OFFSet:PHASe <phase> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:CORRection:OFFSet:PHASe? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:CORRection:OFFSet:PHASe <phase> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:CORRection:OFFSet:PHASe? Description Sets or reads out the value of the phase offset. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr> = {[1]|2|...16} Parameter <phase>...
  • Page 643 Query Response <numeric> Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Scale > Phase Offset Back to CALCulate Page 643...

  • Page 644: Calc:corr:stat

    CALC:CORR:STAT? SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:CORRection:STATus? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:CORRection:STATus? Description Reads out the interpolation/extrapolation status of the error correction. query only Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr> = {[1]|2|...16} Query Response Trace represents S-parameter: NONE Correction not applied...
  • Page 645 Correction applied exactly Correction interpolated Correction extrapolated Equivalent Softkeys None Back to CALCulate Page 645...

  • Page 646: Calc:data:fdat

    CALC:DATA:FDAT SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:DATA:FDATa <numeric list> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:DATA:FDATa? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:DATA:FDATa <numeric list> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:DATA:FDATa? Description Reads out or writes the formatted data array. The formatted data array is the data, whose processing is completed including the formatting as the last step. Such data represent the data trace values as they are shown on the screen.
  • Page 647 Trace Format Value 1 Value 2 Group Delay Group delay, sec Lin Mag Linear magnitude Real Real part Imag Imaginary part Smith (Log/Phase) Logarithmic Phase, deg magnitude, dB Smith (Lin/Phase) Linear magnitude Phase, deg Smith (Real/Imag) Real part Imaginary part Smith (R + jX) Impedance (real part), Impedance (imaginary...
  • Page 648 CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr> = {[1]|2|...16} Query Response <numeric 1>, <numeric 2>, …<numeric 2N> Related Commands CALC:FORM Equivalent Softkeys None Back to CALCulate Page 648...

  • Page 649: Calc:data:fmem

    CALC:DATA:FMEM SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:DATA:FMEMory <numeric list> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:DATA:FMEMory? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:DATA:FMEMory <numeric list> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:DATA:FMEMory? Description Reads out or writes the formatted memory array. The formatted memory array is the data, whose processing is completed including the formatting as the last step. Such data represent the memory trace values as they are shown on the screen.
  • Page 650 Trace Format Value 1 Value 2 Group Delay Group delay, sec Lin Mag Linear magnitude Real Real part Imag Imaginary part Smith (Log/Phase) Logarithmic Phase, deg magnitude, dB Smith (Lin/Phase) Linear magnitude Phase, deg Smith (Real/Imag) Real part Imaginary part Smith (R + jX) Impedance (real part), Impedance (imaginary...
  • Page 651 CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr> = {[1]|2|...16} Query Response <numeric 1>, <numeric 2>, …<numeric 2N> Related Commands CALC:MATH:MEM CALC:FORM Equivalent Softkeys None Back to CALCulate Page 651...

  • Page 652: Calc:data:sdat

    CALC:DATA:SDAT SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:DATA:SDATa <numeric list> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:DATA:SDATa? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:DATA:SDATa <numeric list> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:DATA:SDATa? Description Reads out or writes the corrected data array. The corrected data array is the data, whose processing is completed excluding the formatting as the last step. Such data represent S–parameter complex values. The array size is 2N, where N is the number of measurement points.
  • Page 653 Query Response <numeric 1>, <numeric 2>, …<numeric 2N> Equivalent Softkeys None Back to CALCulate Page 653...

  • Page 654: Calc:data:smem

    CALC:DATA:SMEM SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:DATA:SMEMory <numeric list> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:DATA:SMEMory? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:DATA:SMEMory <numeric list> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:DATA:SMEMory? Description Reads out or writes the corrected memory array. The corrected memory array is the data, whose processing is completed excluding the formatting as the last step. Such data represent S–parameter complex values.
  • Page 655 Query Response <numeric 1>, <numeric 2>, …<numeric 2N> Equivalent Softkeys None Back to CALCulate Page 655...

  • Page 656: Calc:data:xax

    CALC:DATA:XAX? SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:DATA:XAXis? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:DATA:XAXis? Description Reads out the X-axis values array. The X-axis values array is the frequency, power or time values array depending on the trace setup. The array contains real values. The array size is N, where N is the number of measurement points. For the n–th point, where n from 1 to N: <numeric n>...
  • Page 657 Related Commands SENS:SWE:TYPE CALC:TRAN:TIME:STAT Equivalent Softkeys None Back to CALCulate Page 657...

  • Page 658: Calc:filt:time

    CALC:FILT:TIME SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME[:TYPE] <char> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME[:TYPE]? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME[:TYPE] <char> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME[:TYPE]? Description Sets or reads out the gate type of the gating function. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr>...
  • Page 659 Preset Value BPAS Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Gating > Type Back to CALCulate Page 659...

  • Page 660: Calc:filt:time:cent

    CALC:FILT:TIME:CENT SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:CENTer <time> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:CENTer? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:CENTer <time> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:CENTer? Description Sets or reads out the gate center value of the gating function. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr>...
  • Page 661 Query Response <numeric> Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Gating > Center Back to CALCulate Page 661...

  • Page 662: Calc:filt:time:shap

    CALC:FILT:TIME:SHAP SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:SHAPe <char> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:SHAPe? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:SHAPe <char> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:SHAPe? Description Sets or reads out the gate shape of the gating function. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr>...
  • Page 663 Query Response {MAX|WIDE|NORM|MIN} Preset Value NORM Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Gating > Shape > {Maximum | Wide | Normal | Minimum} Back to CALCulate Page 663...

  • Page 664: Calc:filt:time:span

    CALC:FILT:TIME:SPAN SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:SPAN <time> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:SPAN? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:SPAN <time> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:SPAN? Description Sets or reads out the gate span value of the gating function. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr>...
  • Page 665 Query Response <numeric> Preset Value 2e–8 Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Gating > Span Back to CALCulate Page 665...

  • Page 666: Calc:filt:time:star

    CALC:FILT:TIME:STAR SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STARt <time> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STARt? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STARt <time> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STARt? Description Sets or reads out the gate start value of the gating function. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr>...
  • Page 667 Query Response <numeric> Preset Value -1e–8 Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Gating > Start Back to CALCulate Page 667...

  • Page 668: Calc:filt:time:stat

    CALC:FILT:TIME:STAT SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STATe {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STATe? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STATe {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STATe? Description Turns the gating function ON/OFF. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr> = {[1]|2|...16} Parameter {ON|1} {OFF|0} Query Response {0|1} Page 668...
  • Page 669 Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Gating > Gating Back to CALCulate Page 669...

  • Page 670: Calc:filt:time:stop

    CALC:FILT:TIME:STOP SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STOP <time> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STOP? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STOP <time> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STOP? Description Sets or reads out the gate stop value of the gating function. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr>...
  • Page 671 Query Response <numeric> Preset Value +1e–8 Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Gating > Stop Back to CALCulate Page 671...

  • Page 672: Calc:form

    CALC:FORM SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FORMat <char> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FORMat? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FORMat <char> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FORMat? Description Sets or reads out the trace format. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr> = {[1]|2|...16} Parameter <char>...
  • Page 673 SLOGarithmic Smith chart format (Log) SCOMplex Smith chart format (Real/Imag) SMITh Smith chart format (R + jX) SADMittance Smith chart format (G + jB) PLINear Polar format (Lin) PLOGarithmic Polar format (Log) POLar Polar format (Real/Imag) MLINear Linear magnitude Voltage standing wave ratio REAL Real part IMAGinary...
  • Page 674 Equivalent Softkeys Format > {Log Mag | Phase | Group Delay | Lin Mag | SWR | Real | Imag | Phase > 180} Format > Smith > {Log/Phase | Lin/Phase | Real/Imag | R+jX | G+jB} Format > Polar > {Log/Phase | Ling/Phase | Real/Imag} Back to CALCulate Page 674...

  • Page 675: Calc:fsim:send:deem:stat

    CALC:FSIM:SEND:DEEM:STAT SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>:FSIMulator:SENDed:DEEMbed:STATe {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>:FSIMulator:SENDed:DEEMbed:STATe? Description Turns the 2-port network de–embedding function ON/OFF. command/query Target The channel <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} Parameter {ON|1} {OFF|0} Query Response {0|1} Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Fixture Simulator > De–Embedding > De–Embedding Back to CALCulate Page 675...

  • Page 676: Calc:fsim:send:deem:port:stat

    CALC:FSIM:SEND:DEEM:PORT:STAT SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>:FSIMulator:SENDed:DEEMbed:PORT<Pt>:STATe {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>:FSIMulator:SENDed:DEEMbed:PORT<Pt>:STATe? Description Turns the 2-port network de–embedding function for specified port ON/OFF. command/query Target Port <Pt> of channel <Ch>, <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} <Pt>={[1]|2} Parameter {ON|1} {OFF|0} Query Response {0|1} Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Fixture Simulator > De–Embedding > Port n {ON/OFF} Back to CALCulate Page 676...

  • Page 677: Calc:fsim:send:deem:port:user:fil

    CALC:FSIM:SEND:DEEM:PORT:USER:FIL SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>:FSIMulator:SENDed:DEEMbed:PORT<Pt>:USER:FILename <string> CALCulate<Ch>:FSIMulator:SENDed:DEEMbed:PORT<Pt>:USER:FILename? Description Sets or reads out the name of the *.S2P file of the de-embedded circuit of the 2- port network de-embedding function. The file contains the circuit S-parameters in Touchstone format. Note: If the full path of the file is not specified, the \FixtireSim subdirectory of the application directory will be searched for the file.

  • Page 678: Calc:fsim:send:pmc:stat

    CALC:FSIM:SEND:PMC:STAT SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>:FSIMulator:SENDed:PMCircuit:STATe {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>:FSIMulator:SENDed:PMCircuit:STATe? Description Turns the 2-port network embedding function ON/OFF. command/query Target The channel <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} Parameter {ON|1} {OFF|0} Query Response {0|1} Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Fixture Simulator > Embedding > Embedding {ON/OFF} Back to CALCulate Page 678...

  • Page 679: Calc:fsim:send:pmc:port:stat

    CALC:FSIM:SEND:PMC:PORT:STAT SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>:FSIMulator:SENDed:PMCircuit:PORT<Pt>:STATe {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>:FSIMulator:SENDed:PMCircuit:PORT<Pt>:STATe? Description Turns the 2-port network embedding function for each port ON/OFF. command/query Target Port <Pt> of channel <Ch>, <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} <Pt>={[1]|2} Parameter {ON|1} {OFF|0} Query Response {0|1} Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Fixture Simulator > Embedding > Port n {ON/OFF} Back to CALCulate Page 679...

  • Page 680: Calc:fsim:send:pmc:port:user:fil

    CALC:FSIM:SEND:PMC:PORT:USER:FIL SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>:FSIMulator:SENDed:PMCircuit:PORT<Pt>:USER:FILename <string> CALCulate<Ch>:FSIMulator:SENDed:PMCircuit:PORT<Pt>:USER:FILename? Description Sets or reads out the name of the *.S2P file of the embedded circuit of the 2-port network embedding function. The file contains the circuit S-parameters in Touchstone format. Note: If the full path of the file is not specified, the \FixtireSim subdirectory of the application directory will be searched for the file.

  • Page 681: Calc:fsim:send:zcon:port:z0

    CALC:FSIM:SEND:ZCON:PORT:Z0 SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>:FSIMulator:SENDed:ZCONversion:PORT<Pt>:Z0[:R] <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>:FSIMulator:SENDed:ZCONversion:PORT<Pt>:Z0[:R]? Description Sets or reads out the value of the impedance of the port impedance conversion function. The function sets the real part and zeros the imaginary part of the port impedance. command/query Target Port <Pt> of channel <Ch>, <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} <Pt>={[1]|2} Parameter...
  • Page 682 Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Fixture Simulator > Port Z Conversion > Port n Z0 Real Analysis > Fixture Simulator > Port Z Conversion > Port n Z0 Imag Back to CALCulate Page 682...

  • Page 683: Calc:fsim:send:zcon:port:z0:Real

    CALC:FSIM:SEND:ZCON:PORT:Z0:REAL SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>:FSIMulator:SENDed:ZCONversion:PORT<Pt>:Z0:REAL <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>:FSIMulator:SENDed:ZCONversion:PORT<Pt>:Z0:REAL? Description Sets or reads out the real part of the impedance of the port impedance conversion function. command/query Target Port <Pt> of channel <Ch>, <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} <Pt>={[1]|2} Parameter <numeric> the impedance value from 1e–6 to 1e10 Unit Ω...
  • Page 684 Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Fixture Simulator > Port Z Conversion > Port n Z0 Real Back to CALCulate Page 684...

  • Page 685: Calc:fsim:send:zcon:port:z0:Imag

    CALC:FSIM:SEND:ZCON:PORT:Z0:IMAG SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>:FSIMulator:SENDed:ZCONversion:PORT<Pt>:Z0:IMAGinary <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>:FSIMulator:SENDed:ZCONversion:PORT<Pt>:Z0:IMAGinary? Description Sets or reads out the imaginary part of the impedance of the port impedance conversion function. command/query Target Port <Pt> of channel <Ch>, <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} <Pt>={[1]|2} Parameter <numeric> the impedance value from 1e–6 to 1e10 Unit Ω...
  • Page 686 Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Fixture Simulator > Port Z Conversion > Port n Z0 Imag Back to CALCulate Page 686...

  • Page 687: Calc:fsim:send:zcon:stat

    CALC:FSIM:SEND:ZCON:STAT SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>:FSIMulator:SENDed:ZCONversion:STATe {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>:FSIMulator:SENDed:ZCONversion:STATe? Description Turns the port impedance conversion function ON/OFF. command/query Target The channel <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} Parameter {ON|1} {OFF|0} Query Response {0|1} Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Fixture Simulator > Port Z Conversion > Port Z Conversion {ON/OFF} Back to CALCulate...

  • Page 688: Calc:fsim:send:zcon:the

    CALC:FSIM:SEND:ZCON:THE SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>:FSIMulator:SENDed:ZCONversion:THEory {TRAVelling | POWer} CALCulate<Ch>:FSIMulator:SENDed:ZCONversion:THEory? Description Selects the theory of the S-parameters Re-normalization (Port Z Conversion). command/query Target The channel <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} Parameter <char> Specifies Theory: TRAVelling The travelling waves theory POWer The power waves theory Query Response {TRAV|POV} Preset Value TRAV...

  • Page 689: Calc:fsim:stat

    CALC:FSIM:STAT SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>:FSIMulator:STATe {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>:FSIMulator:STATe? Description Turns the fixture simulation function ON/OFF. command/query Target The channel <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} Parameter {ON|1} {OFF|0} Query Response {0|1} Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Fixture Simulator > Fixture Simulator {ON/OFF} Back to CALCulate Page 689...

  • Page 690: Calc:func:data

    CALC:FUNC:DATA? SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FUNCtion:DATA? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FUNCtion:DATA? Description Reads out the data array, which is the CALC:FUNC:EXEC command analysis result. The array size is 2N, where N is the number of points. For the n–th point, where n from 1 to N: <numeric 2n–1>...
  • Page 691 Related Commands CALC:FUNC:EXEC CALC:FUNC:POIN? Equivalent Softkeys None Back to CALCulate Page 691...

  • Page 692: Calc:func:dom

    CALC:FUNC:DOM SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FUNCtion:DOMain[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FUNCtion:DOMain[:STATe]? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FUNCtion:DOMain[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FUNCtion:DOMain[:STATe]? Description Specifies whether an arbitrary range or the entire sweep range is used when the CALC:FUNC:EXEC command is executed. command/query Target All traces of channel <Ch> (if the coupling set to CALC:FUNC:DOM:COUP command), CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] —...
  • Page 693 Parameter Select the following: {ON|1} Arbitrary range {OFF|0} Entire sweep range Query Response {0|1} Preset Value Related Commands CALC:FUNC:EXEC CALC:FUNC:DOM:COUP Equivalent Softkeys None Back to CALCulate Page 693...

  • Page 694: Calc:func:dom:coup

    CALC:FUNC:DOM:COUP SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FUNCtion:DOMain:COUPle {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FUNCtion:DOMain:COUPle? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FUNCtion:DOMain:COUPle {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FUNCtion:DOMain:COUPle? Description If the arbitrary range is turned ON by the CALC:FUNC:DOM command, specifies whether all traces of the channel use the same range (coupling) or if each trace uses an individual range when the CALC:FUNC:EXEC command is executed.
  • Page 695 Related Commands CALC:FUNC:EXEC Equivalent Softkeys None Back to CALCulate Page 695...

  • Page 696: Calc:func:dom:star

    CALC:FUNC:DOM:STAR SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FUNCtion:DOMain:STARt <stimulus> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FUNCtion:DOMain:STARt? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FUNCtion:DOMain:STARt <stimulus> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FUNCtion:DOMain:STARt? Description Sets the start value of the analysis range of the CALC:FUNC:EXEC command. command/query Target All traces of channel <Ch> (if the coupling set to CALC:FUNC:DOM:COUP command), CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>...
  • Page 697 Query Response <numeric> Preset Value Related Commands CALC:FUNC:DOM Equivalent Softkeys None Back to CALCulate Page 697...

  • Page 698: Calc:func:dom:stop

    CALC:FUNC:DOM:STOP SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FUNCtion:DOMain:STOP <stimulus> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FUNCtion:DOMain:STOP? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FUNCtion:DOMain:STOP <stimulus> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FUNCtion:DOMain:STOP? Description Sets the stop value of the analysis range of the CALC:FUNC:EXEC command. command/query Target All traces of channel <Ch> (if the coupling set to CALC:FUNC:DOM:COUP command), CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>...
  • Page 699 Query Response <numeric> Preset Value Related Commands CALC:FUNC:DOM Equivalent Softkeys None Back to CALCulate Page 699...

  • Page 700: Calc:func:exec

    CALC:FUNC:EXEC SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FUNCtion:EXECute CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FUNCtion:EXECute Description Executes the analysis specified by the CALC:FUNC:TYPE command. The analysis result can be read out by the CALC:FUNC:DATA? command. no query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch>...

  • Page 701: Calc:func:pexc

    CALC:FUNC:PEXC SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FUNCtion:PEXCursion <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FUNCtion:PEXCursion? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FUNCtion:PEXCursion <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FUNCtion:PEXCursion? Description Sets the lower limit for the peak excursion value when executing the peak search with the CALC:FUNC:EXEC command. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch>...
  • Page 702 Preset Value Related Commands CALC:FUNC:EXEC Equivalent Softkeys None Back to CALCulate Page 702...

  • Page 703: Calc:func:poin

    CALC:FUNC:POIN? SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FUNCtion:POINts? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FUNCtion:POINts? Description Reads out the number of points (data pairs) of the analysis result by the CALC:FUNC:EXEC command. Always reads out 1, when the search is executed for the maximum, minimum, mean, standard deviation, peak, and peak-to-peak values. The actual number of points is read out, when the search is executed for all peak or all targets.
  • Page 704 Back to CALCulate Page 704...

  • Page 705: Calc:func:ppol

    CALC:FUNC:PPOL SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FUNCtion:PPOLarity <char> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FUNCtion:PPOLarity? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FUNCtion:PPOLarity <char> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FUNCtion:PPOLarity? Description Selects polarity when performing peak search with CALC:FUNC:EXEC command. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr> = {[1]|2|...16} Parameter <char>...
  • Page 706 Query Response {POS|NEG|BOTH} Preset Value Related Commands CALC:FUNC:EXEC Equivalent Softkeys None Back to CALCulate Page 706...

  • Page 707: Calc:func:targ

    CALC:FUNC:TARG SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FUNCtion:TARGet <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FUNCtion:TARGet? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FUNCtion:TARGet <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FUNCtion:TARGet? Description Selects the target level when performing the search for the trace and the target level crosspoints with the CALC:FUNC:EXEC command. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch>...
  • Page 708 Preset Value Related Commands CALC:FUNC:EXEC Equivalent Softkeys None Back to CALCulate Page 708...

  • Page 709: Calc:func:ttr

    CALC:FUNC:TTR SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FUNCtion:TTRansition <char> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FUNCtion:TTRansition? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FUNCtion:TTRansition <char> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FUNCtion:TTRansition? Description Sets or reads out the transition type when using the CALC:FUNC:EXEC command to search crosspoints the trace and the target level (the ATARget analysis type is specified by the CALC:FUNC:TYPE command).
  • Page 710 Query Response {POS|NEG|BOTH} Preset Value Related Commands CALC:FUNC:EXEC Equivalent Softkeys None Back to CALCulate Page 710...

  • Page 711: Calc:func:type

    CALC:FUNC:TYPE SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FUNCtion:TYPE <char> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:FUNCtion:TYPE? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FUNCtion:TYPE <char> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:FUNCtion:TYPE? Description Selects the type of analysis executed with the CALC:FUNC:EXEC command. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr> = {[1]|2|...16} Parameter <char>...
  • Page 712 MAXimum Maximum value MINimum Minimum value PEAK Search for peak APEak Search for all the peaks ATARget Search for all targets Query Response {PTP|STDEV|MEAN|MAX|MIN|PEAK|APE|ATAR} Preset Value Related Commands CALC:FUNC:EXEC Equivalent Softkeys None Back to CALCulate Page 712...

  • Page 713: Calc:hold:type

    CALC:HOLD:TYPE SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:HOLD:TYPE <char> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:HOLD:TYPE? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:HOLD:TYPE <char> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:HOLD:TYPE? Description Sets the type of the trace hold function. The function holds the trace at the maximum or minimum point. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch>...
  • Page 714 Query Response {OFF|MAX|MIN} Preset Value Related Commands CALC:HOLD:CLEar Equivalent Softkeys Display > Trace Hold > Hold Type {OFF | Maximum | Minimum} Back to CALCulate Page 714...

  • Page 715: Calc:hold:cle

    CALC:HOLD:CLE SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:HOLD:CLEar CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:HOLD:CLEar Description This command resets the trace hold function. command Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr> = {[1]|2|...16} Related Commands CALC:HOLD:TYPE Equivalent Softkeys Display >...

  • Page 716: Calc:lim

    CALC:LIM SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:LIMit[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:LIMit[:STATe]? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:LIMit[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:LIMit[:STATe]? Description Turns the limit test ON/OFF. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr> = {[1]|2|...16} Parameter {ON|1} {OFF|0} Query Response {0|1} Page 716...
  • Page 717 Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Limit Test > Limit Test Back to CALCulate Page 717...

  • Page 718: Calc:lim:data

    CALC:LIM:DATA SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:LIMit:DATA <numeric list> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:LIMit:DATA? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:LIMit:DATA <numeric list> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:LIMit:DATA? Page 718...
  • Page 719 Description Sets the data array, which is the limit line in the limit test function. The array size is 1 + 5N, where N is the number of limit line segments. For the n–th point, where n from 1 to N: <numeric 1>...
  • Page 720 Query Response <numeric 1>, <numeric 2>, …<numeric 5N+1> Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Limit Test > Edit Limit Line Back to CALCulate Page 720...

  • Page 721: Calc:lim:disp

    CALC:LIM:DISP SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:LIMit:DISPlay[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:LIMit:DISPlay[:STATe]? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:LIMit:DISPlay[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:LIMit:DISPlay[:STATe]? Description Turns the limit line display of the limit test function ON/OFF. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr>...
  • Page 722 Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Limit Test > Limit Line Back to CALCulate Page 722...

  • Page 723: Calc:lim:fail

    CALC:LIM:FAIL? SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:LIMit:FAIL? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:LIMit:FAIL? Description Reads out the limit test result. query only Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr> = {[1]|2|...16} Parameter Fail Pass Equivalent Softkeys None Back to CALCulate...

  • Page 724: Calc:lim:offs:ampl

    CALC:LIM:OFFS:AMPL SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:LIMit:OFFSet:AMPLitude <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:LIMit:OFFSet:AMPLitude? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:LIMit:OFFSet:AMPLitude <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:LIMit:OFFSet:AMPLitude? Description Sets and reads out the value of the limit line offset along the Y-axis. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch>...
  • Page 725 Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Limit Test > Limit Line Offsets > Response Offset Back to CALCulate Page 725...

  • Page 726: Calc:lim:offs:mark

    CALC:LIM:OFFS:MARK SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:LIMit:OFFSet:MARKer CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:LIMit:OFFSet:MARKer Description Sets the value of the limit line offset along the Y-axis to the active marker value. no query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr>...

  • Page 727: Calc:lim:offs:stim

    CALC:LIM:OFFS:STIM SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:LIMit:OFFSet:STIMulus <stimulus> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:LIMit:OFFSet:STIMulus? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:LIMit:OFFSet:STIMulus <stimulus> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:LIMit:OFFSet:STIMulus? Description Sets and reads out the value of the limit line offset along the X-axis. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch>...
  • Page 728 Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Limit Test > Limit Lines Offsets > Stimulus Offset Back to CALCulate Page 728...

  • Page 729: Calc:lim:rep:all

    CALC:LIM:REP:ALL? SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:LIMit:REPort:ALL? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:LIMit:REPort:ALL? Description Reads out the limit test result report. The array size is 4N, where N is the number of measurement points. For the n–th point, where n from 1 to N: <numeric 4n–3> the stimulus value in the n-th point; <numeric 4n–2>...
  • Page 730 Related Commands FORM:DATA Equivalent Softkeys None Back to CALCulate Page 730...

  • Page 731: Calc:lim:rep:poin

    CALC:LIM:REP:POIN? SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:LIMit:REPort:POINts? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:LIMit:REPort:POINts? Description Reads out the number of the measurement points that failed the limit test. The stimulus data array of these points can be read out by the CALC:LIM:REP? command. query only Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>...

  • Page 732: Calc:lim:rep

    CALC:LIM:REP? SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:LIMit:REPort[:DATA]? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:LIMit:REPort[:DATA]? Description Reads out the data array, which is the stimulus values of the measurement points that failed the limit test. The array size is set by the CALC:LIM:REP:POIN? command. query only Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>...

  • Page 733: Calc:mark

    CALC:MARK SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe]? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe]? Description Turns the marker ON/OFF. Turning ON a marker with the number from 1 to 15 will turn ON all the markers of smaller numbers. Turning OFF a marker with the number from 1 to 15 will turn OFF all the markers of greater numbers (except of the reference marker with number 16).
  • Page 734 Parameter {ON|1} {OFF|0} Query Response {0|1} Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Markers > Add Marker | Remove Marker Markers > Reference Marker Back to CALCulate Page 734...

  • Page 735: Calc:mark:act

    CALC:MARK:ACT SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer<Mk>:ACTivate CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>MARKer<Mk>:ACTivate Description Sets the active marker. If the marker is not ON, this function will turn the marker ON. Turning ON a marker with the number from 1 to 15 will turn ON all the markers of smaller numbers. Turning ON the reference marker with number 16 does not turn ON the markers with the numbers from 1 to 15, but switches these markers to the relative measurement mode.
  • Page 736 Back to CALCulate Page 736...

  • Page 737: Calc:mark:bwid

    CALC:MARK:BWID SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer:BWIDth[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer:BWIDth[:STATe]? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer:BWIDth[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer:BWIDth[:STATe]? Description Turns the bandwidth search function ON/OFF. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr> = {[1]|2|...16} Parameter {ON|1} {OFF|0} Query Response {0|1}...
  • Page 738 Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Markers > Marker Math > Bandwidth Search > Bandwidth Search Back to CALCulate Page 738...

  • Page 739: Calc:mark:bwid:data

    CALC:MARK:BWID:DATA? SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer<Mk>:BWIDth:DATA? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer<Mk>:BWIDth:DATA? Description Reads out the bandwidth search result. The bandwidth search can be performed relatively to the marker <Mk>, or relatively to the absolute maximum value of the trace (in this case the number of the marker is ignored), what is set by the CALC:MARK:BWID:REF command.
  • Page 740 Query Response <numeric 1>, <numeric 2>, …<numeric 4> Related Commands CALC:MARK:BWID:REF Equivalent Softkeys None Back to CALCulate Page 740...

  • Page 741: Calc:mark:bwid:ref

    CALC:MARK:BWID:REF SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer:BWIDth:REFerence <char> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer:BWIDth:REFerence? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer:BWIDth:REFerence <char> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer:BWIDth:REFerence? Description Selects the reference for the bandwidth search function: marker or absolute maximum/minimum value of the trace. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch>...
  • Page 742 Query Response {MAX|MARK|MIN} Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Markers > Marker Math > Bandwidth Search > Search Ref To Back to CALCulate Page 742...

  • Page 743: Calc:mark:bwid:thr

    CALC:MARK:BWID:THR SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer<Mk>:BWIDth:THReshold <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer<Mk>:BWIDth:THReshold? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer<Mk>:BWIDth:THReshold <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer<Mk>:BWIDth:THReshold? Description Sets the bandwidth search threshold value. command/query Target Marker <Mk> of the active trace of channel <Ch>, Marker <Mk> of the trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr> = {[1]|2|...16} <Mk>...
  • Page 744 Query Response <numeric> Preset Value -3.0 Equivalent Softkeys Markers > Marker Math > Bandwidth Search > Bandwidth Value Back to CALCulate Page 744...

  • Page 745: Calc:mark:bwid:type

    CALC:MARK:BWID:TYPE SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer:BWIDth:TYPE <char> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer:BWIDth:TYPE? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer:BWIDth:TYPE <char> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer:BWIDth:TYPE? Description Sets the type of the bandwidth search function. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr> = {[1]|2|...16} Parameter <char>...
  • Page 746 Preset Value BPAS Equivalent Softkeys Markers > Marker Math > Bandwidth Search > Type Back to CALCulate Page 746...

  • Page 747: Calc:mark:coun

    CALC:MARK:COUN SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer:COUNt <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer:COUNt? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer:COUNt <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer:COUNt? Description Sets the number of turned ON markers. Note: Choosing 16 turns on the reference marker and sets the markers 1 to 15 to the relative values. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>...
  • Page 748 Query Response <numeric> Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys None Back to CALCulate Page 748...

  • Page 749: Calc:mark:coup

    CALC:MARK:COUP SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer:COUPle {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer:COUPle? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer:COUPle {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer:COUPle? Description Turns the marker coupling between traces ON/OFF. When coupled, the markers of different traces but with the same number track the X-axis position. command/query Target All the traces of channel <Ch>, <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} Parameter {ON|1}...
  • Page 750 Equivalent Softkeys Marker > Properties > Marker Couple Back to CALCulate Page 750...

  • Page 751: Calc:mark:data

    CALC:MARK:DATA? SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer:DATA? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer:DATA? Description Reads out the data array of all turned ON trace markers. The array size is 3N + 1, where N is the number of turned ON markers including the reference marker. If the reference marker is turned ON the last three elements of array contain the reference marker data and the rest elements of array contain the relative values.
  • Page 752 All markers of the active trace of channel <Ch>, <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} Query Response <numeric 1>, <numeric 2>, …<numeric 3N+1> Related Commands CALC:MARK:COUN FORM:DATA Equivalent Softkeys None Back to CALCulate Page 752...

  • Page 753: Calc:mark:disc

    CALC:MARK:DISC SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer:DISCrete {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer:DISCrete? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer:DISCrete {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer:DISCrete? Description Turns the marker discrete mode ON/OFF. command/query Target All traces of channel <Ch> (if the marker coupling is set to ON by the CALC:MARK:COUP command), CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>...
  • Page 754 Query Response {0|1} Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Marker > Properties > Discrete {ON/OFF} Back to CALCulate Page 754...

  • Page 755: Calc:mark:func:dom

    CALC:MARK:FUNC:DOM SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer:FUNCtion:DOMain[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer:FUNCtion:DOMain[:STATe]? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer:FUNCtion:DOMain[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer:FUNCtion:DOMain[:STATe]? Description Turns the state of the arbitrary range when executing the marker search ON/OFF. If the state of an arbitrary range is ON, marker search is performed in the range specified CALC:MARK:FUNC:DOM:STAR, CALC:MARK:FUNC:DOM:STOP commands.
  • Page 756 Parameter {ON|1} Arbitrary range {OFF|0} Entire sweep range Query Response {0|1} Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Markers > Marker Search > Search Range Back to CALCulate Page 756...

  • Page 757: Calc:mark:func:dom:coup

    CALC:MARK:FUNC:DOM:COUP SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer:FUNCtion:DOMain:COUPle {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer:FUNCtion:DOMain:COUPle? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer:FUNCtion:DOMain:COUPle {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer:FUNCtion:DOMain:COUPle? Description Turns the state of the marker search range coupling for different traces ON/OFF. If the arbitrary search range turned ON by the CALC:MARK:FUNC:DOM command, specifies whether (coupling) or each trace uses individual range when the marker search is performed.
  • Page 758 Equivalent Softkeys Markers > Marker Search > Couple Back to CALCulate Page 758...

  • Page 759: Calc:mark:func:dom:star

    CALC:MARK:FUNC:DOM:STAR SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer:FUNCtion:DOMain:STARt <stimulus> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer:FUNCtion:DOMain:STARt? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer:FUNCtion:DOMain:STARt <stimulus> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer:FUNCtion:DOMain:STARt? Description Sets or reads out the start value of the marker search range. command/query Target All traces of channel <Ch> (if the marker search range coupling is set to ON by the CALC:MARK:FUNC:DOM:COUP command), CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] —...
  • Page 760 Query Response <numeric> Preset Value Lower limit of the analyzer frequency range Equivalent Softkeys Markers > Marker Search > Search Start Back to CALCulate Page 760...

  • Page 761: Calc:mark:func:dom:stop

    CALC:MARK:FUNC:DOM:STOP SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer:FUNCtion:DOMain:STOP <stimulus> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer:FUNCtion:DOMain:STOP? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer:FUNCtion:DOMain:STOP <stimulus> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer:FUNCtion:DOMain:STOP? Description Sets or reads out the stop value of the marker search range. command/query Target All traces of channel <Ch> (if the marker search range coupling is set to ON by the CALC:MARK:FUNC:DOM:COUP command), CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] —...
  • Page 762 Query Response <numeric> Preset Value Upper limit of the analyzer frequency range Equivalent Softkeys Markers > Marker Search > Search Stop Back to CALCulate Page 762...

  • Page 763: Calc:mark:func:exec

    CALC:MARK:FUNC:EXEC SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute Description Executes the marker search according to the specified criterion. The type of the marker search is set by the CALC:MARK:FUNC:TYPE command. no query Target Marker <Mk> of the active trace of channel <Ch>, Marker <Mk> of the trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch>...
  • Page 764 Markers > Marker Search > Target > {Search Target | Search Target Left | Search Target Right} Back to CALCulate Page 764...

  • Page 765: Calc:mark:func:pexc

    CALC:MARK:FUNC:PEXC SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:PEXCursion <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:PEXCursion? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:PEXCursion <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:PEXCursion? Description Sets or reads out the peak excursion value when the marker peak search is performed by the CALC:MARK:FUNC:EXEC command. command/query Target Marker <Mk> of the active trace of channel <Ch>, Marker <Mk>...
  • Page 766 Query Response <numeric> Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Markers > Marker Search > Peak > Peak Excursion Back to CALCulate Page 766...

  • Page 767: Calc:mark:func:ppol

    CALC:MARK:FUNC:PPOL SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:PPOLarity <char> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:PPOLarity? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:PPOLarity <char> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:PPOLarity? Description Selects the peak polarity when the marker peak search is performed by the CALC:MARK:FUNC:EXEC command. command/query Target Marker <Mk> of the active trace of channel <Ch>, Marker <Mk> of the trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch>...
  • Page 768 Parameter <char> Specifies the peak polarity: POSitive Positive polarity NEGative Negative polarity BOTH Both positive polarity and negative polarity Query Response {POS|NEG|BOTH} Preset Value Related Commands CALC:MARK:FUNC:EXEC Equivalent Softkeys Markers > Marker Search > Peak > Peak Polarity > {Positive | Negative | Both} Back to CALCulate Page 768...

  • Page 769: Calc:mark:func:targ

    CALC:MARK:FUNC:TARG SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:TARGet <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:TARGet? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:TARGet <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:TARGet? Description Sets or reads out the target value when the marker target search is performed by CALC:MARK:FUNC:EXEC command. command/query Target Marker <Mk> of the active trace of channel <Ch>, Marker <Mk> of the trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch>...
  • Page 770 Query Response <numeric> Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Markers > Marker Search > Target > Target Value Back to CALCulate Page 770...

  • Page 771: Calc:mark:func:trac

    CALC:MARK:FUNC:TRAC SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:TRACking {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:TRACking? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:TRACking {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:TRACking? Description Turns the marker search tracking ON/OFF. command/query Target Marker <Mk> of the active trace of channel <Ch>, Marker <Mk> of the trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr> = {[1]|2|...16} <Mk>...
  • Page 772 Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Markers > Marker Search > Tracking Back to CALCulate Page 772...

  • Page 773: Calc:mark:func:ttr

    CALC:MARK:FUNC:TTR SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:TTRansition <char> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:TTRansition? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:TTRansition <char> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:TTRansition? Description Selects the type of the target transition when the marker transition search is performed by the CALC:MARK:FUNC:EXEC command. command/query Target Marker <Mk> of the active trace of channel <Ch>, Marker <Mk> of the trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch>...
  • Page 774 BOTH positive and negative edges Query Response {POS|NEG|BOTH} Preset Value Related Commands CALC:MARK:FUNC:EXEC Equivalent Softkeys Marker > Marker Search > Target > Target Transition > {Positive | Negative | Both} Back to CALCulate Page 774...

  • Page 775: Calc:mark:func:type

    CALC:MARK:FUNC:TYPE SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:TYPE <char> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:TYPE? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:TYPE <char> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:TYPE? Description Selects the type of the marker search, which is performed by the CALC:MARK:FUNC:EXEC command. command/query Target Marker <Mk> of the active trace of channel <Ch>, Marker <Mk> of the trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch>...
  • Page 776 PEAK Peak search LPEak Peak search to the left from the marker RPEak Peak search to the right from the marker TARGet Target search LTARget Target search to the left from the marker RTARget Target search to the right from the marker Query Response {MAX|MIN|PEAK|LPE|RPE|TARG|LTAR|RTAR} Preset Value...

  • Page 777: Calc:mark:math:flat:data

    CALC:MARK:MATH:FLAT:DATA? SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer:MATH:FLATness:DATA? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer:MATH:FLATness:DATA? Description Reads out the FLATNESS function data array. The FLATNESS function is applied within the range determined by two markers. The array includes 4 elements: <numeric 1> Span; <numeric 2> Gain; <numeric 3> Slope; <numeric 4> Flatness. query only Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] —...
  • Page 778 Related Commands CALC:MARK:MATH:FLAT:DOM:STAR CALC:MARK:MATH:FLAT:DOM:STOP Equivalent Softkeys None Back to CALCulate Page 778...

  • Page 779: Calc:mark:math:flat:stat

    CALC:MARK:MATH:FLAT:STAT SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer:MATH:FLATness:STATe {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer:MATH:FLATness:STATe? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer:MATH:FLATness:STATe {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer:MATH:FLATness:STATe? Description Turns the marker flatness function ON/OFF. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr> = {[1]|2|...16} Parameter {ON|1} {OFF|0} Query Response {0|1}...
  • Page 780 Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Markers > Marker Math > Flatness > Flatness Back to CALCulate Page 780...

  • Page 781: Calc:mark:math:flat:dom:star

    CALC:MARK:MATH:FLAT:DOM:STAR SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer:MATH:FLATness:DOMain:STARt <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer:MATH:FLATness:DOMain:STARt? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer:MATH:FLATness:DOMain:STARt <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer:MATH:FLATness:DOMain:STARt? Description Sets or reads out the number of the marker, which specifies the start frequency of the flatness function domain. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch>...
  • Page 782 Equivalent Softkeys Markers > Marker Math > Flatness > Flatness Start Back to CALCulate Page 782...

  • Page 783: Calc:mark:math:flat:dom:stop

    CALC:MARK:MATH:FLAT:DOM:STOP SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer:MATH:FLATness:DOMain:STOP <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer:MATH:FLATness:DOMain:STOP? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer:MATH:FLATness:DOMain:STOP <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer:MATH:FLATness:DOMain:STOP? Description Sets or reads out the number of the marker, which specifies the stop frequency of the flatness function domain. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch>...
  • Page 784 Equivalent Softkeys Markers > Marker Math > Flatness > Flatness Stop Back to CALCulate Page 784...

  • Page 785: Calc:mark:ref

    CALC:MARK:REF SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer:REFerence[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer:REFerence[:STATe]? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer:REFerence[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer:REFerence[:STATe]? Description Turns the reference marker ON/OFF. When the reference marker is turned ON, all the values of the other markers turn to relative values. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>...
  • Page 786 Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Markers > Reference Marker Back to CALCulate Page 786...

  • Page 787: Calc:mark:set

    CALC:MARK:SET SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer<Mk>:SET <char> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer<Mk>:SET <char> Description Sets the value of the specified item to the value of the position of the marker. no query Target Marker <Mk> of the active trace of channel <Ch>, Marker <Mk> of the trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch>...
  • Page 788 Equivalent Softkeys Markers > Marker Functions > {Marker–>Start | Marker–>Stop | Marker – >Center | Marker–>Ref Value | Marker–>Delay} Back to CALCulate Page 788...

  • Page 789: Calc:mark:x

    CALC:MARK:X SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer<Mk>:X <stimulus> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer<Mk>:X? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer<Mk>:X <stimulus> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer<Mk>:X? Description Sets or reads out the stimulus value of the marker. command/query Target Marker <Mk> of the active trace of channel <Ch>, Marker <Mk> of the trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch>...
  • Page 790 Out of Range Sets the value of the limit, which is closer to the specified value. Query Response <numeric> Preset Value Stimulus center value Equivalent Softkeys Markers > Edit Stimulus Back to CALCulate Page 790...

  • Page 791: Calc:mark:y

    CALC:MARK:Y? SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MARKer<Mk>:Y? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MARKer<Mk>:Y? Description Reads out the response value of the marker. If the reference marker is turned ON, the values of the markers from 1 to 15 are read out as relative values to the reference marker. The data include 2 elements: <numeric 1>...
  • Page 792 Related Commands CALC:MARK:REF Equivalent Softkeys None Back to CALCulate Page 792...

  • Page 793: Calc:math:func

    CALC:MATH:FUNC SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MATH:FUNCtion <char> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MATH:FUNCtion? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MATH:FUNCtion <char> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MATH:FUNCtion? Description Selects the math operation between the data trace and the memory trace. The math result replaces the data trace. If the memory trace does not exist, the command is ignored. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] —...
  • Page 794 SUBTract Subtraction Data – Mem No math Query Response {OFF|DIV|MULT|SUBT|ADD} Preset Value Related Commands CALC:MATH:MEM Equivalent Softkeys Display > Data Math > {Data/Mem | Data*Mem | Data+Mem | Data–Mem | OFF} Back to CALCulate Page 794...

  • Page 795: Calc:math:mem

    CALC:MATH:MEM SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MATH:MEMorize CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MATH:MEMorize Description Copies the measurement data to the memory trace. Automatically turns on the display the memory trace. no query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr>...

  • Page 796: Calc:mst

    CALC:MST SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MSTatistics[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MSTatistics[:STATe]? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MSTatistics[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MSTatistics[:STATe]? Description Turns the math statistics display ON/OFF. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr> = {[1]|2|...16} Parameter {ON|1} Math statistics display ON {OFF|0} Math statistics display OFF...
  • Page 797 Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Markers > Marker Math > Statistics > Statistics Back to CALCulate Page 797...

  • Page 798: Calc:mst:data

    CALC:MST:DATA? SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MSTatistics:DATA? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MSTatistics:DATA? Description Reads out the math statistics values. The statistics function is applied either over the whole range, or within the range specified by the CALC:MST:DOM command (the range limits are determined by two markers). The data include 3 elements: <numeric 1>...
  • Page 799 Related Commands CALC:MST Equivalent Softkeys None Back to CALCulate Page 799...

  • Page 800: Calc:mst:dom

    CALC:MST:DOM SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MSTatistics:DOMain[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MSTatistics:DOMain[:STATe]? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MSTatistics:DOMain[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MSTatistics:DOMain[:STATe]? Description Selects either the partial frequency range or the entire frequency range to be used for math statistic calculation. The partial frequency range is limited by two markers. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>...
  • Page 801 Query Response {0|1} Preset Value Related Commands CALC:MST:DOM:STAR CALC:MST:DOM:STOP Equivalent Softkeys Markers > Marker Math > Statistics > Statistics Range Back to CALCulate Page 801...

  • Page 802: Calc:mst:dom:star

    CALC:MST:DOM:STAR SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MSTatistics:DOMain[:MARKer]:STARt <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MSTatistics:DOMain[:MARKer]:STARt? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MSTatistics:DOMain[:MARKer]:STARt <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MSTatistics:DOMain[:MARKer]:STARt? Description Sets or reads out the number of the marker, which specifies the start frequency of the math statistics range. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch>...
  • Page 803 Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Markers > Marker Math > Statistics > Statistics Start Back to CALCulate Page 803...

  • Page 804: Calc:mst:dom:stop

    CALC:MST:DOM:STOP SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MSTatistics:DOMain[:MARKer]:STOP <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:MSTatistics:DOMain[:MARKer]:STOP? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MSTatistics:DOMain[:MARKer]:STOP <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MSTatistics:DOMain[:MARKer]:STOP? Description Sets or reads out the number of the marker, which specifies the stop frequency of the math statistics range. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch>...
  • Page 805 Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Markers > Marker Math > Statistics > Statistics Stop Back to CALCulate Page 805...

  • Page 806: Calc:par:coun

    CALC:PAR:COUN SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:COUNt <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:COUNt? Description Sets or reads out the number of traces in the channel. command/query Target The channel <Ch>, <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} Parameter <numeric> The number of the traces in the channel from 1 to 16 Out of Range Sets the value of the limit, which is closer to the specified value.

  • Page 807: Calc:par:def

    CALC:PAR:DEF SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter<Tr>:DEFine <char> CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter<Tr>:DEFine? Description Selects the measurement parameter of the trace. command/query Target Trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Tr>={[1]|2|...16} <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} Parameter <char> Specifies parameter: S11, S21, S12, S22 S-parameter A, B Test receiver R1, R2 Reference receiver Query Response {S11|S21|S12|S22|R1(n)|R2(n)|A(n)|B(n)}, Where n is the stimulus port number...
  • Page 808 Measurement > S11 | S21 | S12 | S22 … Measurement > Absolute > {A(1) | B(1) | R1(1) | A(2) | B(2) | R2(2)} Back to CALCulate Page 808...

  • Page 809: Calc:par:sel

    CALC:PAR:SEL SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter<Tr>:SELect Description Selects the active trace in the channel. Note: If the trace number is greater than the number of the traces displayed in the channel, an error occurs, and the command is ignored. no query Target Trace <Tr>...

  • Page 810: Calc:par:spor

    CALC:PAR:SPOR SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter<Tr>:SPORt <port> CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter<Tr>:SPORt? Description Sets or reads out the number of the stimulus port when performing absolute measurements or DC Voltage measurements. command/query Target Trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Tr>={[1]|2|...16} <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} Parameter <port> the number of the stimulus port Out of Range Error occurs.

  • Page 811: Calc:rlim

    CALC:RLIM SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:RLIMit[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:RLIMit[:STATe]? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:RLIMit[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:RLIMit[:STATe]? Description Turns the ripple limit test ON/OFF. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr> = {[1]|2|...16} Parameter Choose from: {ON|1} {OFF|0} Query Response...
  • Page 812 Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Ripple Limit > Ripple Test Back to CALCulate Page 812...

  • Page 813: Calc:rlim:data

    CALC:RLIM:DATA SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:RLIMit:DATA <numeric list> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:RLIMit:DATA? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:RLIMit:DATA <numeric list> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:RLIMit:DATA? Description Sets the data array, which is the limit line for the ripple limit function. The array size is 1 + 4N, where N is the number of limit line segments. For the n–th point, where n from 1 to N: <numeric 1>...
  • Page 814 Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr> = {[1]|2|...16} Query Response <numeric 1>, <numeric 2>, …<numeric 4N+1> Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Ripple Limit > Edit Ripple Limit Back to CALCulate Page 814...

  • Page 815: Calc:rlim:disp:line

    CALC:RLIM:DISP:LINE SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:RLIMit:DISPlay:LINE {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:RLIMit:DISPlay:LINE? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:RLIMit:DISPlay:LINE {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:RLIMit:DISPlay:LINE? Description Turns the ripple limit line display ON/OFF. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr> = {[1]|2|...16} Parameter Choose from: {ON|1} {OFF|0}...
  • Page 816 Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Ripple Limit > Ripple Limit Back to CALCulate Page 816...

  • Page 817: Calc:rlim:disp:sel

    CALC:RLIM:DISP:SEL SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:RLIMit:DISPlay:SELect <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:RLIMit:DISPlay:SELect? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:RLIMit:DISPlay:SELect <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:RLIMit:DISPlay:SELect? Description Sets or reads out the number of the ripple limit test band selected for the ripple value display. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch>...
  • Page 818 Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Ripple Limit > Ripple Value Band Back to CALCulate Page 818...

  • Page 819: Calc:rlim:disp:val

    CALC:RLIM:DISP:VAL SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:RLIMit:DISPlay:VALue <char> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:RLIMit:DISPlay:VALue? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:RLIMit:DISPlay:VALue <char> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:RLIMit:DISPlay:VALue? Description Selects the display type of the ripple value in the specified band. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr>...
  • Page 820 Query Response {OFF|ABS|MAR} Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Ripple Limit > Ripple Value Back to CALCulate Page 820...

  • Page 821: Calc:rlim:fail

    CALC:RLIM:FAIL? SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:RLIMit:FAIL? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:RLIMit:FAIL? Description Reads out the ripple limit test result. query only Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr> = {[1]|2|...16} Parameter Fail Pass Equivalent Softkeys None Back to CALCulate...

  • Page 822: Calc:rlim:rep

    CALC:RLIM:REP? SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:RLIMit:REPort[:DATA]? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:RLIMit:REPort[:DATA]? Description Reads out the data array, which is the ripple limit test result. The array size is 1+3N, where N is the number of ripple limit bands. For the n–th point, where n from 1 to N: <numeric 1>...
  • Page 823 Query Response <numeric 1>, <numeric 2>, …<numeric 3N+1> Equivalent Softkeys None Back to CALCulate Page 823...

  • Page 824: Calc:smo

    CALC:SMO SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:SMOothing[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:SMOothing[:STATe]? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:SMOothing[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:SMOothing[:STATe]? Description Turns the trace smoothing ON/OFF. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr> = {[1]|2|...16} Parameter Choose from: {ON|1} {OFF|0} Query Response...
  • Page 825 Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Average > Smoothing Back to CALCulate Page 825...

  • Page 826: Calc:smo:aper

    CALC:SMO:APER SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:SMOothing:APERture <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:SMOothing:APERture? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:SMOothing:APERture <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:SMOothing:APERture? Description Sets or reads out the smoothing aperture when performing smoothing function. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr>...
  • Page 827 Query Response <numeric> Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Average > Smo Aperture Back to CALCulate Page 827...

  • Page 828: Calc:tran:time

    CALC:TRAN:TIME SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:TRANsform:TIME[:TYPE] <char> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:TRANsform:TIME[:TYPE]? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:TRANsform:TIME[:TYPE] <char> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:TRANsform:TIME[:TYPE]? Description Selects the transformation type for the time domain transformation function: bandpass or lowpass. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr>...
  • Page 829 Preset Value BPAS Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Time Domain > Type > {Bandpass | Lowpass Step | Lowpass Impulse} Analysis > Gating > DUT Low Pass Back to CALCulate Page 829...

  • Page 830: Calc:tran:time:cent

    CALC:TRAN:TIME:CENT SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:TRANsform:TIME:CENTer <time> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:TRANsform:TIME:CENTer? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:TRANsform:TIME:CENTer <time> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:TRANsform:TIME:CENTer? Description Sets or reads out the time domain center value when the time domain transformation function is turned ON. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch>...
  • Page 831 Query Response <numeric> Preset Value Related Commands CALC:TRAN:TIME:UNIT Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Time Domain > Center Back to CALCulate Page 831...

  • Page 832: Calc:tran:time:dc:val

    CALC:TRAN:TIME:DC:VAL SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:TRANsform:TIME:DC:VALue <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:TRANsform:TIME:DC:VALue? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:TRANsform:TIME:DC:VALue <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:TRANsform:TIME:DC:VALue? Description Sets or reads out the DC value used in the lowpass type of the time domain transformation, when the DC extrapolation is OFF. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>...
  • Page 833 Preset Value Related Commands CALC:TRAN:TIME:EXTR:DC Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Time Domain > DC Value Analysis > Gating > DC Value Back to CALCulate Page 833...

  • Page 834: Calc:tran:time:extr:dc

    CALC:TRAN:TIME:EXTR:DC SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:TRANsform:TIME:EXTRapolate:DC[:STATe] {OFF|ON| 0|1} CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:TRANsform:TIME:EXTRapolate:DC[:STATe]? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:TRANsform:TIME:EXTRapolate:DC[:STATe] {OFF|ON| 0|1} CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:TRANsform:TIME:EXTRapolate:DC[:STATe]? Description Turns ON/OFF the DC extrapolation, when the time domain transformation function is turned ON. The DC value is used in the lowpass type of transformation. When extrapolation value CALC:TRAN:TIME:DC:VAL command is used.
  • Page 835 Query Response {0|1} Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Time Domain > Extrapolate DC Analysis > Gating > Extrapolate DC Back to CALCulate Page 835...

  • Page 836: Calc:tran:time:imp:widt

    CALC:TRAN:TIME:IMP:WIDT SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:TRANsform:TIME:IMPulse:WIDTh <time> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:TRANsform:TIME:IMPulse:WIDTh? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:TRANsform:TIME:IMPulse:WIDTh <time> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:TRANsform:TIME:IMPulse:WIDTh? Description Sets or reads out the impulse width (time domain transformation resolution), coupled with the Kaiser-Bessel window shape β parameter. The impulse width setting changes the β parameter and setting of β parameter changes the impulse width.
  • Page 837 Out of Range Sets the value of the limit, which is closer to the specified value. Query Response <numeric> Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Time Domain > Window > Impulse Width (when the transformation type is set to Bandpass or Lowpass Impulse) Back to CALCulate Page 837...

  • Page 838: Calc:tran:time:kbes

    CALC:TRAN:TIME:KBES SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:TRANsform:TIME:KBESsel <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:TRANsform:TIME:KBESsel? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:TRANsform:TIME:KBESsel <numeric> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:TRANsform:TIME:KBESsel? Description Sets or reads out the β parameter, which controls the Kaise-Bessel window shape when performing the time domain transformation. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch>...
  • Page 839 Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Time Domain > Window > Kaiser Beta Back to CALCulate Page 839...

  • Page 840: Calc:tran:time:lpfr

    CALC:TRAN:TIME:LPFR SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:TRANsform:TIME:LPFRequency CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:TRANsform:TIME:LPFRequency Description Changes the frequency range to the harmonic grid in order to match with the lowpass type of the time domain transformation function. no query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch>...

  • Page 841: Calc:tran:time:refl:type

    CALC:TRAN:TIME:REFL:TYPE SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:TRANsform:TIME:REFLection:TYPE <char> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:TRANsform:TIME:REFLection:TYPE? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:TRANsform:TIME:REFLection:TYPE <char> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:TRANsform:TIME:REFLection:TYPE? Description Selects the reflection distance either one way or round trip for the time domain transformation function. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch>...
  • Page 842 Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Time Domain >Reflection Type > {Round Trip | One Way} Back to CALCulate Page 842...

  • Page 843: Calc:tran:time:span

    CALC:TRAN:TIME:SPAN SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:TRANsform:TIME:SPAN <time> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:TRANsform:TIME:SPAN? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:TRANsform:TIME:SPAN <time> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:TRANsform:TIME:SPAN? Description Sets or reads out the time domain span value when the time domain transformation function is turned ON. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch>...
  • Page 844 Query Response <numeric> Preset Value 2e-8 Related Commands CALC:TRAN:TIME:UNIT Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Time Domain > Span Back to CALCulate Page 844...

  • Page 845: Calc:tran:time:star

    CALC:TRAN:TIME:STAR SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:TRANsform:TIME:STARt <time> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:TRANsform:TIME:STARt? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:TRANsform:TIME:STARt <time> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:TRANsform:TIME:STARt? Description Sets or reads out the time domain start value when the time domain transformation function is turned ON. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch>...
  • Page 846 Query Response <numeric> Preset Value -1e-8 Related Commands CALC:TRAN:TIME:UNIT Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Time Domain > Start Back to CALCulate Page 846...

  • Page 847: Calc:tran:time:stop

    CALC:TRAN:TIME:STOP SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:TRANsform:TIME:STOP <time> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:TRANsform:TIME:STOP? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:TRANsform:TIME:STOP <time> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:TRANsform:TIME:STOP? Description Sets or reads out the time domain stop value when the time domain transformation function is turned ON. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch>...
  • Page 848 Query Response <numeric> Preset Value +1e-8 Related Commands CALC:TRAN:TIME:UNIT Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Time Domain > Stop Back to CALCulate Page 848...

  • Page 849: Calc:tran:time:stat

    CALC:TRAN:TIME:STAT SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:TRANsform:TIME:STATe {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:TRANsform:TIME:STATe? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:TRANsform:TIME:STATe {OFF|ON|0|1} CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:TRANsform:TIME:STATe? Description Turns the time domain transformation function ON/OFF. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr> = {[1]|2|...16} Parameter {ON|1} {OFF|0} Query Response...
  • Page 850 Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Time Domain > Time Domain Back to CALCulate Page 850...

  • Page 851: Calc:tran:time:step:rtim

    CALC:TRAN:TIME:STEP:RTIM SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:TRANsform:TIME:STEP:RTIMe <time> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:TRANsform:TIME:STEP:RTIMe? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:TRANsform:TIME:STEP:RTIMe <time> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:TRANsform:TIME:STEP:RTIMe? Description Sets or reads out the rise time of the step signal (time domain transformation resolution), coupled with the Kaiser-Bessel window shape β parameter. The impulse width setting changes the β parameter and setting of β parameter changes the impulse width.
  • Page 852 Out of Range Sets the value of the limit, which is closer to the specified value. Query Response <numeric> Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Time Domain > Window > Impulse Width (when the transformation type is set to Lowpass Step) Back to CALCulate Page 852...

  • Page 853: Calc:tran:time:stim

    CALC:TRAN:TIME:STIM SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:TRANsform:TIME:STIMulus <char> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:TRANsform:TIME:STIMulus? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:TRANsform:TIME:STIMulus <char> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:TRANsform:TIME:STIMulus? Description Selects the stimulus type for the time domain transformation function: impulse or step. The stimulus type is valid for the lowpass devices. For the bandpass devices the impulse type is always used. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] —...
  • Page 854 Query Response {IMP|STEP} Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Time Domain > Type > {Bandpass | Lowpass Step | Lowpass Impulse} Back to CALCulate Page 854...

  • Page 855: Calc:tran:time:unit

    CALC:TRAN:TIME:UNIT SCPI Command CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:TRANsform:TIME:UNIT <char> CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected]:TRANsform:TIME:UNIT? CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:TRANsform:TIME:UNIT <char> CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:TRANsform:TIME:UNIT? Description Selects the transformation unit for the time domain transformation function: seconds, meters, feet. command/query Target CALCulate<Ch>[:SELected] — active trace of channel <Ch>, CALCulate<Ch>:TRACe<Tr> — trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Ch> = {[1]|2|...16} <Tr>...
  • Page 856 Query Response {SEC|MET|FEET} Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Time Domain > Unit > {Seconds | Meters | Feet} Back to CALCulate Page 856...

  • Page 857: Display

    DISPlay Command Description DISP:COL:BACK Color Settings Background color DISP:COL:GRAT Grid and graticule label color DISP:COL:TRAC:DATA Data trace color DISP:COL:TRAC:MEM Memory trace color DISP:IMAG Colors inversion DISP:COL:RES Interface Settings Resets display settings to default DISP:ENAB Display update ON/OFF DISP:GLAB Graticule Label state DISP:HIDE Hides the Analyzer window DISP:MAX...
  • Page 858 Command Description DISP:SHOW Shows the Analyzer window DISP:UPD One-time display update DISP:WIND:MAX Maximizes the trace in channel ON/OFF DISP:WIND:TITL Channel title display ON/OFF DISP:WIND:TITL:DATA Channel title label DISP:WIND:X:SPAC X-axis type for segment sweep DISP:FONT:SIZE Font Size Settings Font size for all elements DISP:PART:FONT:SIZE Font size of specified element DISP:PART:FONT:SIZE:STAT...
  • Page 859 Command Description DISP:WIND:ANN:MARK:SING Active marker only ON/OFF DISP:WIND:TRAC:ANN:MARK:POS:X X-position of marker annotation DISP:WIND:TRAC:ANN:MARK:POS:Y Y-position of marker annotation DISP:SPL Channel and Trace Number and Layout of channels Settings DISP:WIND:ACT Active channel number (write) DISP:WIND:SPL Allocation of traces in the channel window DISP:WIND:TRAC:MEM Memory Trace Function Memory trace display ON/OFF...
  • Page 860 Command Description DISP:WIND:Y:DIV Number of the scale divisions...

  • Page 861: Disp:col:back

    DISP:COL:BACK SCPI Command DISPlay:COLor:BACK <numeric 1>,<numeric 2>,<numeric 3> DISPlay:COLor:BACK? Description Sets or reads out the background color for trace display. command/query Parameter <numeric 1> Red value R from 0 to 255 <numeric 2> Green value G from 0 to 255 <numeric 3>...

  • Page 862: Disp:col:grat

    DISP:COL:GRAT SCPI Command DISPlay:COLor:GRATicule <numeric 1>,<numeric 2>,<numeric 3> DISPlay:COLor:GRATicule? Description Sets or reads out the grid and the graticule label color for trace display. command/query Parameter <numeric 1> Red value R from 0 to 255 <numeric 2> Green value G from 0 to 255 <numeric 3>...

  • Page 863: Disp:col:res

    DISP:COL:RES SCPI Command DISPlay:COLor:RESet Description Restores the display settings to the default values. no query Equivalent Softkeys Display > Properties > Set Defaults Back to DISPlay Page 863...

  • Page 864: Disp:col:trac:data

    DISP:COL:TRAC:DATA SCPI Command DISPlay:COLor:TRACe<Tr>:DATA <numeric 1>,<numeric 2>,<numeric 3> DISPlay:COLor:TRACe<Tr>:DATA? Description Sets or reads out the data trace color. command/query Target Trace <Tr>, <Tr>={[1]|2|...16} Parameter <numeric 1> Red value R from 0 to 255 <numeric 2> Green value G from 0 to 255 <numeric 3>...
  • Page 865 Back to DISPlay Page 865...

  • Page 866: Disp:col:trac:mem

    DISP:COL:TRAC:MEM SCPI Command DISPlay:COLor:TRACe<Tr>:MEMory <numeric 1>,<numeric 2>,<numeric 3> DISPlay:COLor:TRACe<Tr>:MEMory? Description Sets or reads out the data trace color. command/query Target Trace <Tr>, <Tr>={[1]|2|...16} Parameter <numeric 1> Red value R from 0 to 255 <numeric 2> Green value G from 0 to 255 <numeric 3>...
  • Page 867 Back to DISPlay Page 867...

  • Page 868: Disp:enab

    DISP:ENAB SCPI Command DISPlay:ENABle {OFF|ON|0|1} DISPlay:ENABle? Description Turns the display update ON/OFF. command/query Parameter {ON|1} {OFF|0} Query Response {0|1} Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Display > Update Back to DISPlay Page 868...

  • Page 869: Disp:font:size

    DISP:FONT:SIZE SCPI Command DISPlay:FONT:SIZE <numeric> DISPlay:FONT:SIZE? Description Sets/gets one font size for all displayed elements of the application. command/query Parameter <numeric> Specifies the font size from 10 to 22. Query Response <numeric> Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Display > Properties > Font Size Back to DISPlay Page 869...

  • Page 870: Disp:fsig

    DISP:FSIG SCPI Command DISPlay:FSIGn {OFF|ON|0|1} DISPlay:FSIGn? Description Turns the "Fail" sign display ON/OFF when performing limit test or ripple limit test. command/query Parameter {ON|1} {OFF|0} Query Response {0|1} Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Analysis > Limit Test > Fail Sign Analysis > Ripple Limit > Fail Sign Back to DISPlay Page 870...

  • Page 871: Disp:glab

    DISP:GLAB SCPI Command DISPlay:GLABel <char> DISPlay:GLABel? Description Sets/gets the Graticule Label state. command/query Parameter Specifies the Graticule Label state: Graticule label is OFF ACTive Only active trace has graticule label All traces have graticule label Query Response <char> Preset Value ACTive Equivalent Softkeys Display >...

  • Page 872: Disp:imag

    DISP:IMAG SCPI Command DISPlay:IMAGe <char> DISPlay:IMAGe? Description Turns the inversion of display colors of the trace area ON/OFF. command/query Parameter <char> Choose from: NORMal Normal display INVert Inverted color display Query Response {NORM|INV} Preset Value NORM Equivalent Softkeys Display > Properties > Invert Color Back to DISPlay Page 872...

  • Page 873: Disp:hide

    DISP:HIDE SCPI Command DISPlay:HIDE Description Blanks the Analyzer window, displaying the label "Remote Control". no query Related Commands DISP:SHOW Equivalent Softkeys None Back to DISPlay Page 873...

  • Page 874: Disp:mark:tabl

    DISP:MARK:TABL SCPI Command DISPlay:MARKer:TABLe[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} DISPlay:MARKer:TABLe[:STATe]? Description Turns the marker table ON/OFF. command/query Parameter {ON|1} {OFF|0} Query Response {0|1} Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Display > Marker > Properties > Marker Table Back to DISPlay Page 874...

  • Page 875: Disp:max

    DISP:MAX SCPI Command DISPlay:MAXimize {OFF|ON|0|1} DISPlay:MAXimize? Description Turns the maximization of the active channel window ON/OFF. command/query Target The active channel set by the command DISP:WIND:ACT. Parameter {ON|1} {OFF|0} Query Response {0|1} Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Display > Active Trace/Channel > Maximize channel Back to DISPlay Page 875...

  • Page 876: Disp:part:font:size

    DISP:PART:FONT:SIZE SCPI Command DISPlay:PARTition:FONT:SIZE <char>, <numeric> DISPlay:PARTition:FONT:SIZE? <char> Description Sets/gets the font size of the item specified by the <char> parameter. command/query Parameter <numeric> Specifies the font size from 10 to 22. <char> Specifies display item: BUTTon Soft buttons MENU Menu bar CSTatus Channel status...

  • Page 877: Disp:part:font:size:stat

    DISP:PART:FONT:SIZE:STAT SCPI Command DISPlay:PARTition:FONT:SIZE:STATe {OFF|ON|0|1} DISPlay:PARTition:FONT:SIZE:STATe? Description Specifies whether different elements of the application window have individual font sizes or the same font size. command/query Parameter <bool> Specifies the following: Different elements of the application window may have individual {ON|1} font sizes Different elements of the application window have the same font {OFF|0}...

  • Page 878: Disp:part:vis

    DISP:PART:VIS SCPI Command DISPlay:PARTition:VISible <char>, {OFF|ON|0|1} DISPlay:PARTition:VISible? <char> Description Shows or hides the display partition specified by the <char> parameter. command/query Parameter <bool> Specifies the status of the display partition: {ON|1} Specified <char> display partition ON {OFF|0} Specified <char> display partition OFF <char>...
  • Page 879 Query Response {0|1} Equivalent Softkeys Display > Properties > Menu Bar Display > Display Properties > Frequency Label Markers > Properties > Marker Table or None Back to DISPlay Page 879...

  • Page 880: Disp:pos

    DISP:POS SCPI Command DISPlay:POSition <numeric 1>, <numeric 2>, <numeric 3>, <numeric 4> DISPlay:POSition? Description Sets/gets the Analyzer window position on the screen and its size. command/query Parameter Parameters determine the position of the main window: <numeric 1> Specifies the coordinate of the left side of the window <numeric 2>...
  • Page 881 Preset Value <numeric 1> = (screen width – 800) / 2, <numeric 2> = (screen height – 600) / 2, <numeric 3> = 800, <numeric 4> = 600, Preset: Display > Properties > Set Defaults Equivalent Softkeys None Back to DISPlay Page 881...

  • Page 882: Disp:show

    DISP:SHOW SCPI Command DISPlay:SHOW Description Shows the Analyzer window hidden by the DISP:HIDE command. no query Related Commands DISP:HIDE Equivalent Softkeys None Back to DISPlay Page 882...

  • Page 883: Disp:spl

    DISP:SPL SCPI Command DISPlay:SPLit <numeric> DISPlay:SPLit? Description Sets or reads out the number of channels and channel layout on the screen. The channel layouts on the screen is shown below. command/query Channel window layout on the screen Parameter <numeric> the code of the channel window layout from 1 to 16. Note: the layout code does not correspond to the number of channels.
  • Page 884 Back to DISPlay Page 884...

  • Page 885: Disp:upd

    DISP:UPD SCPI Command DISPlay:UPDate[:IMMediate] Description Updates the display once when the display update is set to OFF by the DISP:ENAB command. no query Related Commands DISP:ENAB Equivalent Softkeys None Back to DISPlay Page 885...

  • Page 886: Disp:wind:act

    DISP:WIND:ACT SCPI Command DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:ACTivate Description Sets the active channel. Note: Trying to set an active channel that is not displayed with the DISP:SPL command will produce an error. no query Target Channel <Ch>, <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} Related Commands DISP:SPL SERV:CHAN:ACT? Equivalent Softkeys Display >...

  • Page 887: Disp:wind:ann:mark:alig

    DISP:WIND:ANN:MARK:ALIG SCPI Command DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:ANNotation:MARKer:ALIGn[:TYPE] <char> DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:ANNotation:MARKer:ALIGn[:TYPE]? Description Sets or reads out the alignment of the marker annotation when the active marker only feature is turned OFF by the DISP:WIND:ANN:MARK:SING command. command/query Target Channel <Ch>, <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} Parameter <char> Choose from: VERTical Vertical alignment HORizontal Horizontal alignment...
  • Page 888 Equivalent Softkeys Markers > Properties > Align > {Vertical | Horizontal | OFF} Back to DISPlay Page 888...

  • Page 889: Disp:wind:ann:mark:sing

    DISP:WIND:ANN:MARK:SING SCPI Command DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:ANNotation:MARKer:SINGle[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:ANNotation:MARKer:SINGle[:STATe]? Description Selects display of either the active trace markers or all trace markers. command/query Target Channel <Ch>, <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} Parameter <char> Choose from: {ON|1} Active trace markers {OFF|0} All trace markers Query Response {0|1} Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Markers >...

  • Page 890: Disp:wind:max

    DISP:WIND:MAX SCPI Command DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:MAXimize {OFF|ON|0|1} DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:MAXimize? Description Turns the active trace maximization inside the specified channel ON/OFF. command/query Target Channel <Ch>, <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} Parameter {ON|1} {OFF|0} Query Response {0|1} Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Display > Active Trace/Channel > Maximize Trace Back to DISPlay Page 890...

  • Page 891: Disp:wind:spl

    DISP:WIND:SPL SCPI Command DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:SPLit <numeric> DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:SPLit? Description Sets or reads out the number of the graph layout in the channel window. The graph layout in the channel window is shown below. Note: This function does not determine the number of traces in the channel window;...
  • Page 892 Query Response <numeric> Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Display > Allocate Traces Back to DISPlay Page 892...

  • Page 893: Disp:wind:titl

    DISP:WIND:TITL SCPI Command DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:TITLe[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:TITLe[:STATe]? Description Turns the channel title display ON/OFF. command/query Target Channel <Ch>, <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} Parameter {ON|1} {OFF|0} Query Response {0|1} Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Display > Title Label Back to DISPlay Page 893...

  • Page 894: Disp:wind:titl:data

    DISP:WIND:TITL:DATA SCPI Command DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:TITLe:DATA <string> DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:TITLe:DATA? Description Sets or reads out the channel title label. command/query Target Channel <Ch>, <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} Parameter <string>, up to 256 characters Query Response <string> Preset Value Empty string Equivalent Softkeys Display > Edit Title Label Back to DISPlay Page 894...

  • Page 895: Disp:wind:trac:ann:mark:pos:x

    DISP:WIND:TRAC:ANN:MARK:POS:X SCPI Command DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:ANNotation:MARKer:POSition:X <numeric> DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:ANNotation:MARKer:POSition:X? Description Sets or reads out the display position of the marker annotation on the X-axis by a percentage of the display width. command/query Target Trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Tr>={[1]|2|...16} <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} Parameter <numeric> the display position of the marker value on the X–axis from 0 to 100 Unit % (percent) Out of Range...
  • Page 896 Equivalent Softkeys Markers > Properties > Data X Position Back to DISPlay Page 896...

  • Page 897: Disp:wind:trac:ann:mark:pos:y

    DISP:WIND:TRAC:ANN:MARK:POS:Y SCPI Command DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:ANNotation:MARKer:POSition:Y <numeric> DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:ANNotation:MARKer:POSition:Y? Description Sets or reads out the display position of the marker annotation on the Y-axis by a percentage of the display height. command/query Target Trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Tr>={[1]|2|...16} <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} Parameter <numeric> the display position of the marker value on the Y–axis from 0 to 100 Unit % (percent) Out of Range...
  • Page 898 Equivalent Softkeys Markers > Properties > Data Y Position Back to DISPlay Page 898...

  • Page 899: Disp:wind:trac:mem

    DISP:WIND:TRAC:MEM SCPI Command DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MEMory[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:MEMory[:STATe]? Description Turns the memory trace display ON/OFF. Note: If the memory trace does not exist, an error occurs, and the command is ignored. command/query Target Trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Tr>={[1]|2|...16} <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} Parameter {ON|1} {OFF|0} Query Response {0|1}...
  • Page 900 Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Display > Trace Display > {Memory | Data & Memory} (ON) Display > Trace Display > {Data | OFF} (OFF) Back to DISPlay Page 900...

  • Page 901: Disp:wind:trac:stat

    DISP:WIND:TRAC:STAT SCPI Command DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:STATe {OFF|ON|0|1} DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:STATe?Description Turns the data trace display ON/OFF. command/query Target Trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Tr>={[1]|2|...16} <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} Parameter {ON|1} {OFF|0} Query Response {0|1} Preset Value Page 901...
  • Page 902 Equivalent Softkeys Display > Trace Display > {Data | Data & Memory} (ON) Display > Trace Display > {Memory | OFF} (OFF) Back to DISPlay Page 902...

  • Page 903: Disp:wind:trac:y:auto

    DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:AUTO SCPI Command DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:Y[:SCALe]:AUTO Description Executes the auto scale function for the trace. The function automatically sets both the PDIVision and the RLEVel values. no query Target Trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Tr>={[1]|2|...16} <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} Related Commands DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:PDIV DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV Equivalent Softkeys Scale >...

  • Page 904: Disp:wind:trac:y:pdiv

    DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:PDIV SCPI Command DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision <numeric> DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision? Description Sets or reads out the trace scale. Sets the scale per division when the data format is in the rectangular format. Sets the full-scale value when the data format is in the Smith chart format or the polar format. command/query Target Trace <Tr>...
  • Page 905 Preset Value Varies depending on the format. Logarithmic Magnitude: 10 dB/Div Phase: 40 °/Div Expand Phase: 100 °/Div Group Delay: 10e–9 s/Div Smith Chart, Polar, SWR: 1 /Div Linear Magnitude: 0.1 /Div Real part, Imaginary part: 0.2 /Div Equivalent Softkeys Scale >...

  • Page 906: Disp:wind:trac:y:rlev

    DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV SCPI Command DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel <numeric> DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel? Description Sets the value of the reference line (response value on the reference line). For the rectangular format only. command/query Target Trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Tr>={[1]|2|...16} <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} Parameter <numeric> the scale value from 10E–18 to 1E18 Out of Range Sets the value of the limit, which is closer to the specified value.
  • Page 907 Preset Value 0 (except for SWR: 1) Equivalent Softkeys Scale > Ref Value Back to DISPlay Page 907...

  • Page 908: Disp:wind:trac:y:rlev:auto

    DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV:AUTO SCPI Command DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:AUTO Description Executes the auto reference function for the trace. The function automatically sets the RLEVel value. no query Target Trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Tr>={[1]|2|...16} <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} Related Commands DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV Equivalent Softkeys Scale > Auto Ref Value Back to DISPlay Page 908...

  • Page 909: Disp:wind:trac:y:rpos

    DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:RPOS SCPI Command DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition <numeric> DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:TRACe<Tr>:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition? Description Sets the position of the reference line. For the rectangular format only. command/query Target Trace <Tr> of channel <Ch>, <Tr>={[1]|2|...16} <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} Parameter <numeric> the reference line position from 0 to the number of the scale divisions (set by the DISP:WIND:Y:DIV command, 10 by default) Out of Range Sets the value of the limit, which is closer to the specified value.

  • Page 910: Disp:wind:x:spac

    DISP:WIND:X:SPAC SCPI Command DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:X:SPACing <char> DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:X:SPACing? Description Sets or reads out the display method of the graph horizontal axis for the segment sweep. command/query Target Channel <Ch>, <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} Parameter <char> Choose from: LINear Frequency base (linear frequency axis) OBASe Order base (linear axis of the point numbers) Out of Range The command is ignored.
  • Page 911 Related Commands SENS:SWE:TYPE Equivalent Softkeys Stimulus > Segment Table > Segment Display Back to DISPlay Page 911...

  • Page 912: Disp:wind:y:div

    DISP:WIND:Y:DIV SCPI Command DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:Y[:SCALe]:DIVisions <numeric> DISPlay:WINDow<Ch>:Y[:SCALe]:DIVisions? Description Sets the number of the vertical scale divisions. For the rectangular format only. command/query Target Channel <Ch>, <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} Parameter <numeric> the number of the vertical scale divisions from 4 to 30 Out of Range Sets the value of the limit, which is closer to the specified value.

  • Page 913: Format

    FORMat Command Description FORM:BORD Data Transfer Byte order FORM:DATA Text or binary transfer format FORM:PUSH Push and set byte order and transfer format FORM:POP byte order transfer format Page 913...

  • Page 914: Form:bord

    FORM:BORD SCPI Command FORMat:BORDer <char> FORMat:BORDer? Description Sets or reads out the transfer order of each byte in data when the binary data transfer format is set by the FORM:DATA command. Note: The compatible processors use the little-endian format. command/query Parameter <char>...

  • Page 915: Form:data

    FORM:DATA SCPI Command FORMat:DATA <char> FORMat:DATA? Description Sets or reads out the data transfer format when responding to the following queries: CALC:DATA:FDAT? SENS:CORR:COLL:DATA:LOAD? CALC:DATA:FMEM? SENS:CORR:COLL:DATA:OPEN? CALC:DATA:SDAT? SENS:CORR:COLL:DATA:SHOR? CALC:DATA:SMEM? SENS:CORR:COLL:DATA:THRU:MAT CALC:DATA:XAX? SENS:CORR:COLL:DATA:THRU:TRA CALC:FUNC:DATA? CALC:LIM:DATA? SENS:DATA:CORR? CALC:LIM:REP? SENS:DATA:RAWD? CALC:LIM:REP:ALL? SENS:FREQ:DATA? CALC:MARK:DATA? SENS:OFFS:SOUR:DATA? CALC:RLIM:DATA? SENS:OFFS:REC:DATA? CALC:RLIM:REP?
  • Page 916 Parameter <char> Choose from: ASCii Character format REAL Binary format (IEEE–64 floating point) REAL32 Binary format (IEEE–32 floating point) Query Response {ASC|REAL|REAL32} Preset Value Related Commands FORM:BORD Equivalent Softkeys None Back to FORMat Page 916...

  • Page 917: Form:push

    FORM:PUSH SCPI Command FORMat:PUSH <format>,<border> Description Saves the current settings and sets new values for the data transfer format and byte order. Note: The compatible processors use the little-endian format. command only Parameter <char> Choose from: ASCii Character format REAL Binary format (IEEE–64 floating point) REAL32 Binary format (IEEE–32 floating point)

  • Page 918: Form:pop

    FORM:POP SCPI Command FORMat:POP Description Restores the settings for the data transfer format and byte order saved by the preceding FORM:PUSH command. command only Related Commands FORM:PUSH Equivalent Softkeys None Back to FORMat Page 918...

  • Page 919: Hcopy

    HCOPy Command Description HCOP Printing Quick print HCOP:ABOR Aborts the printout HCOP:DATE:STAM Date and time stamp ON/OFF HCOP:IMAG Inverted color of image HCOP:PAIN Color chart for image printout Page 919...

  • Page 920: Hcop

    HCOP SCPI Command HCOPy[:IMMediate] Description Prints out the image displayed on the screen without previewing. no query Equivalent Softkeys System > Print > Print Embedded Back to HCOPy Page 920...

  • Page 921: Hcop:abor

    HCOP:ABOR SCPI Command HCOPy:ABORt Description Aborts the printout. no query Equivalent Softkeys None Back to HCOPy Page 921...

  • Page 922: Hcop:date:stam

    HCOP:DATE:STAM SCPI Command HCOPy:DATE:STAMp {OFF|ON|0|1} HCOPy:DATE:STAMp? Description Turns the date and time printout in the upper right corner of the image ON/OFF. command/query Parameter {ON|1} {OFF|0} Query Response {0|1} Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys System > Print > Print Date & Time Back to HCOPy Page 922...

  • Page 923: Hcop:imag

    HCOP:IMAG SCPI Command HCOPy:IMAGe <char> HCOPy:IMAGe? Description Sets or reads out the inverted color image printout. command/query Parameter <char> Choose from: NORMal Normal printout INVert Inverted color printout Query Response {NORM|INV} Preset Value NORM Equivalent Softkeys System > Print > Invert Image Back to HCOPy Page 923...

  • Page 924: Hcop:pain

    HCOP:PAIN SCPI Command HCOPy:PAINt <char> HCOPy:PAINt? Description Sets or reads out the color chart for the image printout. command/query Parameter <char> Choose from: COLor Color printout GRAY Grayscale printout Black&white printout Query Response {COL|GRAY|BW} Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys System > Print > Print Color Back to HCOPy Page 924...

  • Page 925: Initiate

    INITiate Command Description INIT Trigger Initiates channel once INIT:CONT Continuous channel initiation mode ON/OFF INIT:CONT:ALL Continuous channel initiation mode for all channels ON/OFF Page 925...

  • Page 926: Init

    INIT SCPI Command INITiate<Ch>[:IMMediate] Description Puts the channel into the Trigger Waiting state for one trigger event. The channel should be in the hold state, otherwise an error occurs, and the command is ignored. The channel goes into Hold as a result of the command INIT:CONT OFF.

  • Page 927: Init:cont

    INIT:CONT SCPI Command INITiate<Ch>:CONTinuous {OFF|ON|0|1} INITiate<Ch>:CONTinuous? Description Turns the continuous trigger initiation mode for the channel <Ch> ON/OFF. When the continuous initiation mode is turned ON: · If the Internal trigger source is selected by the command TRIG:SOUR INT, then the channel continuously sweeps; ·...
  • Page 928 Preset Value Related Commands TRIG:SOUR INIT Equivalent Softkeys Stimulus > Trigger > Continuous Stimulus > Trigger > Hold Back to INITiate Page 928...

  • Page 929: Init:cont:all

    INIT:CONT:ALL SCPI Command INITiate:CONTinuous:ALL {OFF|ON|0|1} Description Turns the continuous trigger initiation mode for all channels ON/OFF. command Target Channel <Ch>, <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} Parameter Specifies the continuous trigger initiation mode: {ON|1} {OFF|0} Preset Value Related Commands INIT:CONT Equivalent Softkeys Stimulus > Trigger > Continuous All Channels Stimulus >...

  • Page 930: Mmemory

    MMEMory Command Description MMEM:CAT? Disk Operations Information about the hard drive MMEM:COPY Copies the file MMEM:DEL Deletes the file MMEM:MDIR Creates a directory MMEM:TRAN? Transfers the contents of the file MMEM:LOAD Save/Recall Analyzer State, Calibration Recalls the Analyzer state MMEM:LOAD:CHAN Recalls the channel state from memory register MMEM:LOAD:CHAN:CAL...
  • Page 931 Command Description MMEM:STOR:CHAN:CLE Clears memory registers MMEM:STOR:STYP Saving type MMEM:LOAD:CKIT Calibration Kit Management Recalls calibration kit definition from the file MMEM:STOR:CKIT Save calibration kit definition to the file MMEM:LOAD:LIM Limit Test Recalls limit table from file MMEM:STOR:LIM Saves limit table into file MMEM:LOAD:PLOS Power Calibration Recalls the loss compensation file...
  • Page 932 Command Description MMEM:LOAD:SNP Save S-parameters to Touchstone File Loads file to S-parameters MMEM:LOAD:SNP:TRAC:MEM Loads file to the memory trace MMEM:LOAD:SNP:FREQ Enables the frequency setting from a Touchstone file when it loaded MMEM:STOR:SNP Saves channel data MMEM:STOR:SNP:FORM Data format MMEM:STOR:SNP:SEP Separator of touchstone file MMEM:STOR:SNP:TRAC:TRAN Including trace transform ON/OFF MMEM:STOR:SNP:TYPE?
  • Page 933 Command Description MMEM:STOR:FDAT:FORM Data format MMEM:STOR:FDAT:COMM Comment ON/OFF MMEM:STOR:FDAT:STIM Stimulus data ON/OFF MMEM:STOR:FDAT:SEP Decimal and value separators MMEM:STOR:IMAG Saving Display Image Saves the screen to BMP or PNG file...

  • Page 934: Mmem:cat

    MMEM:CAT? SCPI Command MMEMory:CATalog? <string> Description This command reads out the following information on the hard drive: · Space in use. · Available space. · Name and size of all files (including directories) in the specified directory. query only Parameter <string>...

  • Page 935: Mmem:copy

    MMEM:COPY SCPI Command MMEMory:COPY <string1>,<string2> Description Copies a file. no query Parameter <string1> Source file name <string2> Destination file name Equivalent Softkeys None Back to MMEMory Page 935...

  • Page 936: Mmem:del

    MMEM:DEL SCPI Command MMEMory:DELete <string> Description Deletes a file. no query Parameter <string> File name Equivalent Softkeys None Back to MMEMory Page 936...

  • Page 937: Mmem:load

    MMEM:LOAD SCPI Command MMEMory:LOAD[:STATe] <string> Description Recalls the specified Analyzer state file. The file must be saved by the MMEM:STOR command. Note: If the full path of the file is not specified, the \State subdirectory of the application directory will be searched. The Analyzer state file has *.STA extension by default.

  • Page 938: Mmem:load:chan

    MMEM:LOAD:CHAN SCPI Command MMEMory:LOAD:CHANnel[:STATe] <char> Description Recalls the channel state from memory register. The state must be saved in one of the four memory registers using the MMEM:STOR:CHAN command. no query Target Active channel set by the DISP:WIND:ACT command. Parameter <char>...

  • Page 939: Mmem:load:chan:cal

    MMEM:LOAD:CHAN:CAL SCPI Command MMEMory:LOAD:CHANnel<ch>:CALibration <string> Description Recalls the calibration for the specified channel from the file. The file must be saved using the MMEM:STOR:CHAN:CAL command. Note: If the full path of the file is not specified, the \State subdirectory of the application directory will be searched.

  • Page 940: Mmem:load:ckit

    MMEM:LOAD:CKIT SCPI Command MMEMory:LOAD:CKIT<Ck> <string> Description Recalls the definition file for the calibration kit. The file must be saved using the MMEM:STOR:CKIT command. Note: If the full path of the file is not specified, the \CalKit subdirectory of the application directory will be searched. The limit table file has *.CKD extension by default.

  • Page 941: Mmem:load:lim

    MMEM:LOAD:LIM SCPI Command MMEMory:LOAD:LIMit <string> Description Recalls the limit table file. The file must be saved using the MMEM:STOR:LIM command. Note: If the full path of the file is not specified, the \Limit subdirectory of the application directory will be searched. The limit table file has *.LIM extension by default.

  • Page 942: Mmem:load:plos

    MMEM:LOAD:PLOS SCPI Command MMEMory:LOAD:PLOSs<Pt> <string> Description Recalls the loss compensation file. The file must be saved using the MMEM:STOR:PLOS command. Note: If the full path of the file is not specified, the \CalKit subdirectory of the application directory will be searched. The loss compensation file has *.LCT extension by default.

  • Page 943: Mmem:load:rlim

    MMEM:LOAD:RLIM SCPI Command MMEMory:LOAD:RLIMit <string> Description Recalls the ripple limit table file. The file must be saved using the MMEM:STOR:RLIM command. Note: If the full path of the file is not specified, the \Limit subdirectory of the application directory will be searched. The ripple limit file has *.RLM extension by default.

  • Page 944: Mmem:load:segm

    MMEM:LOAD:SEGM SCPI Command MMEMory:LOAD:SEGMent <string> Description Recalls the segment table file. The file must be saved using the MMEM:STOR:SEGM command. Note: If the full path of the file is not specified, the \Segment subdirectory of the application directory will be searched. The segment file has *.SEG extension by default.

  • Page 945: Mmem:load:snp

    MMEM:LOAD:SNP SCPI Command MMEMory:LOAD:SNP[:DATA] <string> Description Loads the touchstone file with the specified name to the measured S–parameters of the active channel. The touchstone file types 1, 2 port (file extensions S1P, S2P) are supported. On completion of the command, the channel goes to the hold state.

  • Page 946: Mmem:load:snp:freq

    MMEM:LOAD:SNP:FREQ SCPI Command MMEMory:LOAD:SNP:FREQuency[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} MMEMory:LOAD:SNP:FREQuency[:STATe]? Description Determines whether frequency is set from touchstone file or not when the file is loaded by the command MMEM:LOAD:SNP. If this setting is OFF then the touchstone file data is interpolated or extrapolated. command/query Parameter {ON|1}...
  • Page 947 Loads the Touchstone file with the specified name to the memory trace. The Touchstone file types 1, 2 port (file extensions *.S1P, *.S2P) are supported. The current measured S-parameter of data trace selects the appropriate S-parameter from the Touchstone file. After loading, the display of memory trace is automatically switched on.

  • Page 948: Mmem:mdir

    MMEM:MDIR SCPI Command MMEMory:MDIRectory <string> Description Creates a new directory. no query Parameter <string> Directory full name Equivalent Softkeys None Back to MMEMory Page 948...

  • Page 949: Mmem:stor

    MMEM:STOR SCPI Command MMEMory:STORe[:STATe] <string> Description Saves the Analyzer state into a file. Note: If the full path of the file is not specified, the \State subdirectory of the application directory will be searched. The state file has *.STA extension by default.

  • Page 950: Mmem:stor:chan

    MMEM:STOR:CHAN SCPI Command MMEMory:STORe:CHANnel[:STATe] <char> Description Stores the state of the active channel in one of four memory registers. no query Target Active channel set by the DISP:WIND:ACT command Parameter <char> Choose from: Save to register A Save to register B Save to register C Save to register D Equivalent Softkeys...

  • Page 951: Mmem:stor:chan:cal

    MMEM:STOR:CHAN:CAL SCPI Command MMEMory:STORe:CHANnel<ch>:CALibration <string> Description Stores the calibration of the specified channel to the file. Note: If the full path of the file is not specified, the \State subdirectory of the application directory will be searched. The Analyzer calibration file has *.CAL extension by default.

  • Page 952: Mmem:stor:chan:cle

    MMEM:STOR:CHAN:CLE SCPI Command MMEMory:STORe:CHANnel:CLEar Description Clears the memory of the channel state saved using the MMEM:STOR:CHAN command. no query Equivalent Softkeys Save/Recall > Save Channel > Clear States Back to MMEMory Page 952...

  • Page 953: Mmem:stor:ckit

    MMEM:STOR:CKIT SCPI Command MMEMory:STORe:CKIT<Ck> <string> Description Saves the definition file for the calibration kit. Note: If the full path of the file is not specified, the \CalKit subdirectory of the application directory will be searched. The calibration kit definition file has *.CKD extension by default.

  • Page 954: Mmem:stor:fdat

    MMEM:STOR:FDAT SCPI Command MMEMory:STORe:FDATa <string> Description Saves the data of one or several traces to a CSV file. The trace number and the file settings can be configured using the MMEM:STOR:FDAT:XXXX commands. Note: If the full path of the file is not specified, the \CSV subdirectory of the application directory will be searched.

  • Page 955: Mmem:stor:fdat:scop

    MMEM:STOR:FDAT:SCOP SCPI Command MMEMory:STORe:FDAT:SCOPe {ACTive|ALL} MMEMory:STORe:FDAT:SCOPe? Description Sets whether the active trace or all traces of the active channel will be saved using MMEM:STOR:FDAT command. command/query Parameter <char> Choose from: ACTive Active trace only All traces of the active channel Query Response {ACT|ALL} Preset Value...

  • Page 956: Mmem:stor:fdat:form

    MMEM:STOR:FDAT:FORM SCPI Command MMEMory:STORe:FDAT:FORMat {DB|RI|DISPlayed} MMEMory:STORe:FDAT:FORMat? Description Sets the data format when the CSV file is saved using the MMEM:STOR:FDAT command. command/query Parameter <char> Choose from: dB/Angle format Real/Imag format DISPlayed Currently displayed trace format Query Response {DB|RI|DISP} Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Save/Recall >...

  • Page 957: Mmem:stor:fdat:comm

    MMEM:STOR:FDAT:COMM SCPI Command MMEMory:STORe:FDAT:COMMent[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} MMEMory:STORe:FDAT:COMMent[:STATe]? Description Turns the comment strings at the beginning of the CSV file saved with the MMEM:STOR:FDAT command ON/OFF. The comment string starts with the '!' character. command/query Parameter {ON|1} {OFF|0} Query Response {0|1} Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Save/Recall >...

  • Page 958: Mmem:stor:fdat:stim

    MMEM:STOR:FDAT:STIM SCPI Command MMEMory:STORe:FDAT:STIMulus[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} MMEMory:STORe:FDAT:STIMulus[:STATe]? Description Turns the column with the stimulus data in the CSV file saved with the MMEM:STOR:FDAT command ON/OFF. The stimulus column is located at the leftmost position. command/query Parameter {ON|1} {OFF|0} Query Response {0|1} Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Save/Recall >...

  • Page 959: Mmem:stor:fdat:sep

    MMEM:STOR:FDAT:SEP SCPI Command MMEMory:STORe:FDAT:SEParator {POINt|LOCal} MMEMory:STORe:FDAT:SEParator? Description Sets the separators used when the file saved with the MMEM:STOR:FDAT command. command/query Parameter <char> Choose from: Uses point ('.') as decimal separator and comma (',') as value POINt separator LOCal Uses separators from the Windows locale Query Response {POIN|LOC} Preset Value...

  • Page 960: Mmem:stor:imag

    MMEM:STOR:IMAG SCPI Command MMEMory:STORe:IMAGe <string> Description Saves the display image in BMP or PNG format into a file. Note: If the full path of the file is not specified, the \Image subdirectory of the application directory will be searched. If the file has *.PNG extension, the file had PNG format, in all the other cases the file has BMP format.

  • Page 961: Mmem:stor:lim

    MMEM:STOR:LIM SCPI Command MMEMory:STORe:LIMit <string> Description Saves the limit table into a file. Note: If the full path of the file is not specified, the \Limit subdirectory of the application directory will be searched. The file has *.LIM extension by default. no query Target Active trace of the active channel, set by the CALC:PAR:SEL command.

  • Page 962: Mmem:stor:plos

    MMEM:STOR:PLOS SCPI Command MMEMory:STORe:PLOSs<Pt> <string> Description Saves the loss compensation file. Note: If the full path of the file is not specified, the \CalKit subdirectory of the application directory will be searched. The loss compensation file has *.LCT extension by default. no query Target Port <Pt>...

  • Page 963: Mmem:stor:rlim

    MMEM:STOR:RLIM SCPI Command MMEMory:STORe:RLIMit <string> Description Saves the ripple limit table into a file. Note: If the full path of the file is not specified, the \Limit subdirectory of the application directory will be searched. The ripple limit file has *.RLM extension by default.

  • Page 964: Mmem:stor:segm

    MMEM:STOR:SEGM SCPI Command MMEMory:STORe:SEGMent <string> Description Saves the segment table into a file. Note: If the full path of the file is not specified, the \Segment subdirectory of the application directory will be searched. The segment file has *.SEG extension by default.

  • Page 965: Mmem:stor:snp

    MMEM:STOR:SNP SCPI Command MMEMory:STORe:SNP[:DATA] <string> Description Saves the measured S-parameters of the active channel into a Touchstone file. file type (1-port) following commands: MMEM:STOR:SNP:TYPE:S1P, MMEM:STOR:SNP:TYPE:S2P. Note: If the full path of the file is not specified, the \FixtureSim subdirectory of the application directory will be searched.

  • Page 966: Mmem:stor:snp:form

    MMEM:STOR:SNP:FORM SCPI Command MMEMory:STORe:SNP:FORMat <char> MMEMory:STORe:SNP:FORMat? Description Sets or reads out the data format for the S-parameter saved using the MMEM:STOR:SNP command. command/query Parameter <char> Choose from: Logarithmic Magnitude / Angle format Linear Magnitude / Angle format Real part /Imaginary part format Query Response {RI|DB|MA} Preset Value...

  • Page 967: Mmem:stor:snp:sep

    MMEM:STOR:SNP:SEP SCPI Command MMEMory:STORe:SNP:SEParator <char> MMEMory:STORe:SNP:SEParator? Description Sets or reads out the Touchstone file separator symbol when the S–parameters are saved using the MMEM:STOR:SNP command. command/query Parameter <char> Choose from: Tab symbol (0x09) SPACe Space symbol (0x20) Query Response {TAB|SPAC} Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Save/Recall >...

  • Page 968: Mmem:stor:snp:trac:tran

    MMEM:STOR:SNP:TRAC:TRAN SCPI Command MMEMory:STORe:SNP:TRACe:TRANsform[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} MMEMory:STORe:SNP:TRACe:TRANsform[:STATe]? Description Determines whether the S-parameters include the transformation of the active trace or not when saving the Touchstone file. When this feature is ON, the transformation of the active trace takes effect for all S-parameters (Time domain transform, Gating).

  • Page 969: Mmem:stor:snp:type

    MMEM:STOR:SNP:TYPE? SCPI Command MMEMory:STORe:SNP:TYPE? Description Reads out the type of Touchstone file (S1P, S2P) to be used when saving S– parameters with the MMEM:STOR:SNP command. query only Query Response <string> {S1P|S2P} Equivalent Softkeys Save/Recall > Save Data to Touchstone File > Type Back to MMEMory Page 969...

  • Page 970: Mmem:stor:snp:type:s1P

    MMEM:STOR:SNP:TYPE:S1P SCPI Command MMEMory:STORe:SNP:TYPE:S1P <port> MMEMory:STORe:SNP:TYPE:S1P? Description Sets or reads out the 1-port Touchstone file type (*.S1P) and the port number when saving S–parameters using the MMEM:STOR:SNP command. command/query Parameter <port> port number from 1 to 2 Query Response <numeric> Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Save/Recall >...

  • Page 971: Mmem:stor:snp:type:s2P

    MMEM:STOR:SNP:TYPE:S2P SCPI Command MMEMory:STORe:SNP:TYPE:S2P <port1>,<port2> MMEMory:STORe:SNP:TYPE:S2P? Description Sets or reads out the 2-port Touchstone file type (*.S2P) and the port number when saving S–parameters using the MMEM:STOR:SNP command. command/query Parameter <port1> First port number <port2> Second port number <port> port number from 1 to 2 Query Response <numeric1>, <numeric2>...

  • Page 972: Mmem:stor:styp

    MMEM:STOR:STYP SCPI Command MMEMory:STORe:STYPe <char> MMEMory:STORe:STYPe? Description Selects the type of the Analyzer or channel state saving using the MMEM:STOR MMEM:STOR:CHAN command. command/query Parameter <char> Choose from: STATe Measurement conditions CSTate Measurement conditions and calibration DSTate Measurement conditions and data CDSTate Measurement conditions, calibration, data and memory CMSTate...

  • Page 973: Mmem:tran

    MMEM:TRAN? SCPI Command MMEMory:TRANsfer? <string> Description Transfers the contents of a specified file from the Analyzer to the external PC. Note: The file must be 20 Mbytes or less. command/query Parameter <string> the file name with the full path Query Response Block data transfer format.

  • Page 974: Outp

    OUTP SCPI Command OUTPut[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} OUTPut[:STATe]? Description Turns the RF signal output ON/OFF. Measurements cannot be performed when the RF signal output is turned OFF. command/query Parameter {ON|1} {OFF|0} Query Response {0|1} Preset Value Equivalent Softkeys Stimulus > Power > RF Out Page 974...

  • Page 975: Sense

    SENSe Command Description SENS:AVER Averaging Averaging ON/OFF SENS:AVER:CLE Restart averaging SENS:AVER:COUN Averaging factor SENS:BAND IFBW IF bandwidth SENS:BWID IF bandwidth SENS:CORR:CLE Misc Calibration Commands Clears the table of calibration factors SENS:CORR:COLL:CLE Clears data of calibration standards SENS:CORR:INF? Information string of calibration SENS:CORR:STAT S-parameter error correction state SENS:CORR:TRIG:FREE...
  • Page 976 Command Description SENS:CORR:COEF:METH: Selects one-path two-port method ERES SENS:CORR:COEF:METH: Selects Response Open method OPEN SENS:CORR:COEF:METH: Selects Response Short method SHOR SENS:CORR:COEF:METH: Selects full one-port method SOLT1 SENS:CORR:COEF:METH: Selects full two-port method SOLT2 SENS:CORR:COEF:METH: Selects Response Thru method THRU SENS:CORR:COEF:SAVE Enables calibration coefficients SENS:CORR:COLL:ADAP: Adapter Removal/ Insertion Approximate delay of the adapter...
  • Page 977 Command Description SENS:CORR:COLL:ADAP: Delay units UNIT SENS:CORR:COLL:ADAP: Adapter media SENS:CORR:COLL:ADAP: Permittivity of the adapter media PERM SENS:CORR:COLL:ADAP: Cutoff frequency of the waveguide adapter WAV:CUT SENS:CORR:COLL:METH: Adapter Removal/Insertion ON/OFF ADAP:REM SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT Calibration Kit Management Calibration kit selection SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:D Calibration kit description string SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:L Calibration kit label SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:R...
  • Page 978 Command Description SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:S Insert the standard into a calibration kit TAN:INS SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:S Delete the standard from a calibration kit TAN:REM SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:O Assigning Class to Calibration "Load" class RD:LOAD Standard SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:O "Open" class RD:OPEN SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:O Assignment of subclass RD:SEL SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:O "Short" class RD:SHOR SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:O "Thru"...
  • Page 979 Command Description SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:O "TRL Reflect" class RD:TRLR SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:S Calibration Standard Arbitrary impedance (Load) TAN:ARB Definition SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:S Capacitance C0 (Open) TAN:C0 SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:S Capacitance C1 (Open) TAN:C1 SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:S Capacitance C2 (Open) TAN:C2 SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:S Capacitance C3 (Open) TAN:C3 SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:S Number of standards in the calibration kit TAN:COUN? SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:S S-parameters of the data-based calibration standard...
  • Page 980 Command Description SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:S Max frequency TAN:FMAX SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:S Min frequency TAN:FMIN SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:S Inductance L0 (Short) TAN:L0 SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:S Inductance L1 (Short) TAN:L1 SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:S Inductance L2 (Short) TAN:L2 SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:S Inductance L3 (Short) TAN:L3 SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:S Standard label TAN:LAB SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:S Offset loss TAN:LOSS SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:S Standard type TAN:TYPE...
  • Page 981 Command Description SENS:CORR:COLL:CKIT:S Offset Z0 TAN:Z0 SENS:CORR:COLL:DATA:I Read/Write Measurement of Measurement array of Isolation Calibration Standards SENS:CORR:COLL:DATA: Measurement array of Load LOAD SENS:CORR:COLL:DATA: Measurement array of Open OPEN SENS:CORR:COLL:DATA: Measurement array of Short SHOR SENS:CORR:COLL:DATA: Reflection measurement array of Thru THRU:MATC SENS:CORR:COLL:DATA: Transmission measurement array of Thru...
  • Page 982 Command Description SENS:CORR:COLL:ECAL:I Information about connected module SENS:CORR:COLL:ECAL: Auto-Orientation procedure ORI:EXEC SENS:CORR:COLL:ECAL: Auto-Orientation ON/OFF ORI:STAT SENS:CORR:COLL:ECAL: Manual module orientation PATH SENS:CORR:COLL:ECAL: Procedure of one-port calibration SOLT1 SENS:CORR:COLL:ECAL: Procedure of full two-port calibration SOLT2 SENS:CORR:COLL:ECAL: Thermo compensation ON/OFF THER:COMP SENS:CORR:COLL:ECAL: Characterization number SENS:CORR:COLL:ECAL: Unknown Thru feature ON/OFF UTHR:STAT...
  • Page 983 Command Description SENS:CORR:COLL:ISOL Measurement of Calibration Isolation Standards SENS:CORR:COLL:LOAD Load SENS:CORR:COLL:OPEN Open SENS:CORR:COLL:SHOR Short SENS:CORR:COLL:THRU Thru SENS:CORR:COLL:TRLL TRL Line SENS:CORR:COLL:TRLT TRL Thru SENS:CORR:COLL:TRLR TRL Reflect SENS:CORR:COLL:SUBC Subclass number SENS:CORR:COLL:METH: Calibration Method One path two-port ERES SENS:CORR:COLL:METH: Response Open OPEN...
  • Page 984 Command Description SENS:CORR:COLL:METH: Response Short SHOR SENS:CORR:COLL:METH: Full one-port (SOL) SOLT1 SENS:CORR:COLL:METH: Full two-port (SOLT) SOLT2 SENS:CORR:COLL:METH: Response Thru THRU SENS:CORR:COLL:METH: Multi-line TRL option ON/OFF TRL:MULT SENS:CORR:COLL:METH: Two-port TRL TRL2 SENS:CORR:COLL:METH: Calibration method query. TYPE? SENS:CORR:COLL:SAVE Calibration Completion Calibration completion SENS:CORR:COLL:THRU: Unknown Thru Addition Approximate delay of the Thru...
  • Page 985 Command Description SENS:CORR:COLL:THRU: Approximate length of the Thru ADD:LENG SENS:CORR:COLL:THRU: Delay Units ADD:UNIT SENS:CORR:COLL:THRU: Thru Media ADD:MED SENS:CORR:COLL:THRU: Permittivity of the Thru media ADD:PERM SENS:CORR:COLL:THRU: Cutoff frequency of the waveguide Thru ADD:WAV:CUT SENS:CORR:COLL:THRU: Completion of the full two-port calibration ADD:FULL2:COMP SENS:CORR:EXT Port Extension Port extension ON/OFF...
  • Page 986 Command Description SENS:CORR:EXT:PORT:L Value "Loss at DC" SENS:CORR:EXT:PORT:L Values of "Loss 1" and "Loss 2" SENS:CORR:EXT:PORT:TI Extension Port n SENS:CORR:EXT:AUTO:C Auto Port Extension Frequency range configuration SENS:CORR:EXT:AUTO:D "Loss at DC" value ON/OFF SENS:CORR:EXT:AUTO:L "Loss1" and "Loss2" values ON/OFF SENS:CORR:EXT:AUTO:M Measurement of Short or Open SENS:CORR:EXT:AUTO:P Auto port extension for the specified port ON/OFF SENS:CORR:EXT:AUTO:R...
  • Page 987 Command Description SENS:CORR:EXT:AUTO:S Start frequency of user span SENS:CORR:EXT:AUTO:S Stop frequency of user span SENS:CORR:IMP System Impedance Setting System Z0 SENS:CORR:IMP:SEL:AUT Auto-select Z0 ON/OFF SENS:CORR:PORT:IMP System Z0 for the specified port SENS:CORR:OFFS:CLE Scalar Mixer Calibration Clears calibration coefficient table SENS:CORR:OFFS:COLL: Clears calibration data SENS:CORR:OFFS:COLL: Calibration direction...
  • Page 988 Command Description SENS:CORR:OFFS:COLL: Calibration port METH:SMIX2 SENS:CORR:OFFS:COLL: Measure the Open standard OPEN SENS:CORR:OFFS:COLL: Measure power PMET SENS:CORR:OFFS:COLL: Measure the Short standard SHOR SENS:CORR:OFFS:COLL: Measure the Thru standard THRU SENS:CORR:OFFS:COLL: Completes calibration SAVE SENS:CORR:REC Receiver Calibration Receiver correction ON/OFF SENS:CORR:REC:COLL:A Calibration procedure for both receivers SENS:CORR:REC:COLL:R Reference receiver calibration procedure CH:ACQ...
  • Page 989 Command Description SENS:CORR:REC:COLL:T Test receiver calibration procedure CH:ACQ SENS:CORR:REC:OFFS:A Power offset SENS:CORR:TRAN:TIME:F Cable Correction Frequency at which cable loss specified SENS:CORR:TRAN:TIME:L Cable loss SENS:CORR:TRAN:TIME:R Cable velocity factor SENS:CORR:TRAN:TIME:S Cable correction ON/OFF SENS:CORR:VMC:COLL:E Vector Mixer Calibration Complete the calibration using ACM CAL:SAVE SENS:CORR:VMC:COLL:P Port number for calibration mixer with LPF filter...
  • Page 990 Command Description SENS:CORR:VMC:COLL:L LO frequency O:FREQ SENS:CORR:VMC:COLL:L Measure the Load standard SENS:CORR:VMC:COLL:O Measure the Open standard SENS:CORR:VMC:COLL:S Measure the Short standard SENS:CORR:VMC:COLL:O Setup option (de-embedding calibration mixer + filter at completion of calibration) ON/OFF SENS:CORR:VMC:COLL:S Complete the calibration, calculate S-parameters, write the touchstone file SENS:DATA:CORR? Data Transfer...
  • Page 991 Command Description SENS:FREQ:CENT Center frequency SENS:FREQ:SPAN Span frequency SENS:FREQ:STAR Start frequency SENS:FREQ:STOP Stop frequency SENS:SEGM:DATA Segment sweep table SENS:SWE:CW:TIME Sweep Time SENS:SWE:POIN Number of points SENS:SWE:POIN:TIME Point delay SENS:SWE:REV Reverse sweep ON/OFF SENS:SWE:TYPE Sweep type SENS:OFFS:ADJ Mixer Measurements Frequency offset adjust ON/OFF SENS:OFFS:ADJ:CONT:P Adjust period...
  • Page 992 Command Description SENS:OFFS:ADJ:EXEC Executes adjustment once SENS:OFFS:ADJ:PATH Adjustment path SENS:OFFS:ADJ:PORT Adjusted Port SENS:OFFS:ADJ:VAL Adjust Value SENS:OFFS Frequency offset ON/OFF SENS:OFFS:PORT:DATA? Port offset data SENS:OFFS:PORT:DIV Divisor SENS:OFFS:PORT:MULT Multiplier Port offset settings SENS:OFFS:PORT:OFFS Offset SENS:OFFS:PORT:STAR Start...
  • Page 993 Command Description SENS:OFFS:PORT:STOP Stop SENS:OFFS:REC:DATA? Receiver offset data SENS:OFFS:REC:DIV Receiver offset settings Divisor SENS:OFFS:REC:MULT Multiplier SENS:OFFS:REC:OFFS Offset SENS:OFFS:REC:STAR Start SENS:OFFS:REC:STOP Stop SENS:OFFS:SOUR:DATA? Source offset data SENS:OFFS:SOUR:DIV Source offset settings Divisor SENS:OFFS:SOUR:MULT Multiplier SENS:OFFS:SOUR:OFFS Offset SENS:OFFS:SOUR:STAR Start...
  • Page 994 Command Description SENS:OFFS:SOUR:STOP Stop SENS:OFFS:TYPE Offset type SENS:ROSC:SOUR Analyzer Parameters Reference source SENS:ROSC:EXT:ROUT Route of the external reference frequency...

  • Page 995: Sens:aver

    SENS:AVER SCPI Command SENSe<Ch>:AVERage[:STATe] {OFF|ON|0|1} SENSe<Ch>:AVERage[:STATe]? Description Turns the measurement averaging function ON/OFF. command/query Target Channel <Ch>, <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} Parameter {ON|1} {OFF|0} Query Response {0|1} Preset Value Related Commands SENS:AVER:COUN Equivalent Softkeys Average > Averaging Back to SENSe Page 995...

  • Page 996: Sens:aver:cle

    SENS:AVER:CLE SCPI Command SENSe<Ch>:AVERage:CLEar Description Restarts the averaging process when the averaging function is turned on. no query Target Channel <Ch>, <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} Related Commands SENS:AVER Equivalent Softkeys None Back to SENSe Page 996...

  • Page 997: Sens:aver:coun

    SENS:AVER:COUN SCPI Command SENSe<Ch>:AVERage:COUNt <numeric> SENSe<Ch>:AVERage:COUNt? Description Sets or reads out the averaging factor when the averaging function is turned on. command/query Target Channel <Ch>, <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} Parameter <numeric> the averaging factor from 1 to 999 Out of Range Sets the value of the limit, which is closer to the specified value. Query Response <numeric>...

  • Page 998: Sens:band

    SENS:BAND SCPI Command SENSe<Ch>:BANDwidth[:RESolution] <frequency> SENSe<Ch>:BANDwidth[:RESolution]? Description Sets or reads out the IF bandwidth. command/query Target Channel <Ch>, <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} Parameter <frequency> the IF bandwidth value Unit Hz (Hertz) Out of Range Sets the value of the limit, which is closer to the specified value. Query Response <numeric>...
  • Page 999 Related Commands SENS:BWID — similar command Equivalent Softkeys Average > IF Bandwidth Back to SENSe Page 999...

  • Page 1000: Sens:bwid

    SENS:BWID SCPI Command SENSe<Ch>:BWIDth[:RESolution] <frequency> SENSe<Ch>:BWIDth[:RESolution]? Description Sets or reads out the IF bandwidth. command/query Target Channel <Ch>, <Ch>={[1]|2|...16} Parameter <frequency> the IF bandwidth value Unit Hz (Hertz) Out of Range Sets the value of the limit, which is closer to the specified value. Query Response <numeric>...

Table of Contents